Responses are stored securely, and the app implements Shopify's mandatory privacy webhooks — customer data requests and erasure requests (GDPR) are honored automatically. For anything specific, reach us via the in-app chat.

","heading","Is customer data handled safely?","faq-languages","

The admin interface is available in English, French, German, Spanish, Japanese, and Italian. Survey content is shown to customers exactly as you write it — author your questions in your storefront's language.

","What languages does the app support?","faq-reward","

Yes — add a Promo Code question as the final step, showing a discount code on screen or delivering it by email (\"Get coupon\"). Create the discount itself in Shopify first. See Reward Customers with Discount Codes.

","Can I reward customers for answering?","faq-tags","

Straight onto the customer (or order) record in your Shopify admin, like any other Shopify tag — usable in segments, discounts, and Shopify Flow. They're added by the survey's logic actions (see Branching Logic & Actions).

","Where do the customer tags from surveys go?","faq-duplicate-survey","

Yes — the duplicate row action in the survey list. The standard A/B pattern: duplicate, change one thing (wording, reward, timing), give each half the audience via targeting, and compare response rates in Analytics.

","Can I duplicate a survey?","faq-repeat","

Use the recurrence setting — Show only once, or When the answer is not completed (stops once they finish) — plus max responses per customer to cap submissions. For email surveys, the block duplicate window prevents re-sending to the same customer.

","How do I stop asking customers who already answered?","faq-realtime","

Individual responses appear on the Responses page (and sync to Google Sheets) in real time. Aggregated analytics refresh every few minutes, and very recent figures may adjust for up to two days as late events are counted.

","How quickly do responses appear?","faq-channels","

Yes — enable any combination of the six channels on the same survey. Each keeps its own targeting, timing, and styling, and all responses land in the same analytics. Review targeting per channel so the same customer isn't asked twice in two places.

","Can one survey run on several channels at once?","cf0e34053d1b2220bef9fab85","Survey Not Showing on Storefront","Symptom-based diagnosis — from the most common cause down.",[225,226,227,228,229],[223,224],"installing-ego-surveys","targeting-rules",{"_158":242,"_193":243,"_195":244},{"_158":239,"_193":240,"_195":241},{"_158":236,"_193":237,"_195":238},{"_158":233,"_193":234,"_195":235},{"_158":230,"_193":231,"_195":232},"still-stuck","

Clear your browser cache, test in incognito, try a second browser. If the survey still doesn't appear, contact us via the in-app Chat now with your store URL, the survey name, and the page you expect it on — we'll test it against your actual theme.

","Still stuck?","check-frequency","

If timing is X seconds after load, wait out the delay. If recurrence is Show only once or Stop after X attempts, you've used up your own impressions — incognito makes you a new visitor again. Delay before reappearing means it's simply waiting out the window.

Exit-intent surveys trigger on cursor movement toward leaving the page — on mobile this behaves differently. Test exit intent on desktop first.

","Showed once, now gone → check timing and recurrence","check-targeting","

Targeting rules can silently exclude you: device type (Mobile-only while you test on desktop), login state, country, customer conditions (\"New customer\" excludes you as a repeat visitor), or visit-frequency rules. Two-step diagnosis:

Test in an incognito window — you become a fresh, logged-out visitor.
Still nothing? Temporarily set targeting to All customers / All devices, re-test, then re-add rules one by one to find the excluding one.

","Shows for others but not for you → check targeting","check-survey-status","

In Surveys, open the survey and confirm:

Status is Active (not Inactive).
The right channel is enabled — the on-site widget renders only with Onsite Survey (or Exit Intent) on.
The page you're viewing is among the channel's selected pages (e.g. the widget targets Product pages but you're testing on the homepage).

","Widget missing on a specific page → check status, channel, and pages","check-app-embed","

The on-site widget and exit intent render only when the Ego Surveys app embed is on. Open your Theme Editor → App embeds, toggle Ego Surveys on, save. Two gotchas:

Recently published a new theme? The embed must be re-enabled on that theme.
The Thank-you-page channel does not use the embed — if that one works but the widget doesn't, the embed is almost certainly the issue.

","Nothing shows anywhere → check the app embed","c9200646a65414066225417a7","shopify-flow-integration","Shopify Flow Integration","Trigger Flow automations the moment a customer submits a survey.",[254,255,256],[252,253],"Analytics & Integrations","branching-logic","google-sheets-integration",{"_158":263,"_193":264,"_195":265},{"_158":260,"_193":261,"_195":262},{"_158":257,"_193":258,"_195":259},"tags-from-surveys","

For automations that depend on what the customer answered (not just that they answered), combine Flow with the survey's own logic actions: the survey adds a customer/order tag based on the specific answer (see Branching Logic & Actions), and Flow reacts to the tag. Example: answer \"Yes\" to the discount question → tag discount-interested → Flow sends the offer email.

More integrations, including Klaviyo and Google Analytics, are on the roadmap.

","The answer-to-automation pipeline","survey-submitted-trigger","

The integration ships a Flow trigger called Survey Submitted — it fires every time a customer completes a survey. Automation ideas:

Low-rating alert — notify your team (email/Slack via Flow) when feedback needs a human response today, not at the weekly review.
Segment building — add customers to a marketing segment based on participation.
Support ticket — create a follow-up task when a customer asks to be contacted.

","Step 2 — Build on the “Survey Submitted” trigger","connect-flow","

Go to Integrations → Shopify Flow and connect. Ego Surveys then appears as a trigger source in the Shopify Flow editor, and the app gives you a Create a flow shortcut straight into it.

","Step 1 — Connect","c8206300f1ee253bd079244eb","Google Sheets Integration","Real-time response sync to Sheets, two organization modes, and scheduled email digests.",[272,273,274],[271,246],"viewing-exporting-responses",{"_158":281,"_193":282,"_195":283},{"_158":278,"_193":279,"_195":280},{"_158":275,"_193":276,"_195":277},"scheduled-email","

Schedule an email that delivers the spreadsheet link on a recurring cadence — e.g. every Monday to your team:

Set the recipients, start date, and frequency (in days).
Optionally customize the email subject and body.

The team gets a fresh link on schedule without anyone logging into the app.

","Optional — scheduled email digests","sync-modes","

One spreadsheet per survey — each enabled survey gets its own spreadsheet; the link appears in the app. Best when different people own different surveys.
One store spreadsheet — a single spreadsheet for the whole store with one tab per survey. Best for one shared feedback workbook.

Either way, new responses are appended automatically in real time — no manual export step, no duplicates (each response is written exactly once). Columns match the Excel export: response ID, date, device, browser, customer attributes, plus one column per question.

","Step 2 — Choose how responses are organized","connect-google","

Go to Integrations → Google Sheet and click connect.
A Google sign-in window opens — pick the account and grant access.
Back in the app, the integration shows as connected.

You can disconnect at any time; spreadsheets already created stay in your Google Drive.

","Step 1 — Connect your Google account","c3c65a33052ed625a60eec51f","Viewing & Exporting Responses","Browse individual answers, archive noise, and export to Excel — with the full column list.",[289,290],[253,183],{"_158":294,"_193":295,"_195":296},{"_158":291,"_193":292,"_195":293},"export-to-excel","

Click Export responses to download an .xlsx of the selected survey's responses. Each row is one response with:

ID response, Created Date — identity and timing.
IP Address, Device, Browser — technical context.
New customer, Return customer, Customer tags, Order count, Customer total spent — who answered. Segment your analysis by these: new customers often answer very differently from regulars.
Login state, Country or state — session context.
One column per question — the answers themselves.

Exports are one-off snapshots. For a continuously updated dataset (shared dashboards, weekly reviews), use the Google Sheets integration instead — it appends every new response in real time.

","Exporting to Excel","responses-page","

Open Responses, select a survey, and set a date range. The table is searchable and paginated; click any row for the full response detail — every answer plus the respondent's context. Responses you don't need (tests, spam) can be archived to keep the working list clean.

","Browsing responses","c281e61e3f757d8d53e501939","Understanding Survey Analytics","Every metric defined, per-question charts, and how to read the numbers.",[304,305,306,307],"3 min",true,[271,253],{"_158":317,"_193":318,"_195":319},{"_158":314,"_193":315,"_195":316},{"_158":311,"_193":312,"_195":313},{"_158":308,"_193":309,"_195":310},"data-freshness","

Individual responses appear in the Responses browser immediately. Aggregated analytics refresh every few minutes, and late-arriving events are back-filled for up to two days — so very recent numbers can shift slightly before settling. Don't compare today's partial numbers against a full past week.

","Data freshness","question-charts","

Below the metrics, every question gets its own breakdown:

Choice, rating, and NPS questions — switch between Bar, Pie, and Table views, with counts and percentages per option. Star Rating buckets 1–5, NPS buckets 0–10, and rating questions also show an average score.
Slider — a Line chart of the value distribution.
Like/Dislike — a grouped bar of likes vs. dislikes per option.
Ranked Choice — average rank per option plus the full rank distribution.
Text, email, date, and number questions — a searchable, paginated table of raw answers.

","Per-question charts","metrics-explained","

Metric	Meaning	What a bad number tells you
Total impressions	How many times the survey was displayed.	Low → targeting too narrow, or channel/embed off.
Response rate	Share of impressions where the customer started answering.	Low → first question or placement isn't compelling; try a reward or a better opening question.
Completion rate	Share of impressions that ended in a completed survey.	High responses but low completions → survey too long; cut questions.
Survey reach	Distinct visitors who saw the survey (unique people, not views).	—
Close survey	How many times (and what share) the survey was dismissed.	High → placement or timing feels intrusive; add a delay or move the position.
Average completion time	Average time from first interaction to completion.	Long → questions are hard to parse; simplify wording.

","Metrics explained","analytics-page","

Open Analytics, pick a survey via Select survey, and choose a date range: Today, Last 3 / 7 / 14 / 30 days. The Dashboard also shows store-wide totals, your most-answered surveys, and the latest responses at a glance.

","The Analytics page","c1021555ff044ad170203cef7","Targeting Rules","Every targeting condition explained, with recipes for the common setups.",[328,329,330,331,332],[326,327],"Channels & Targeting","onsite-widget-exit-intent","email-surveys",{"_158":345,"_193":346,"_195":347},{"_158":342,"_193":343,"_195":344},{"_158":339,"_193":340,"_195":341},{"_158":336,"_193":337,"_195":338},{"_158":333,"_193":334,"_195":335},"combining-rules","

Rules combine with AND (all must match) or OR (any may match). Example recipes:

Return customer AND Product pages AND Desktop → repeat buyers researching products on desktop.
New customer OR fewer than 2 orders → everyone still early in their journey.

Two habits that save headaches: (1) Start broad and narrow later — over-targeting is the #1 reason a survey \"never shows up\". (2) Test targeted surveys in an incognito window — as a logged-in repeat visitor, you often don't match your own rules.

","Combining rules — and testing them","device-and-location","

Restrict by device type (All / Desktop / Mobile), login state (all / logged in / not logged in), and country or state.

","Device, login state & location","behavior-targeting","

Has visited pages — URL equals / contains / starts with / ends with a value, N times. E.g. only survey visitors who saw the pricing page.
Number & frequency of site visits — e.g. at least 3 visits within the last 7 days. Time spans: any time, 6 or 12 hours, 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30 days. Targets engaged repeat visitors.
Page views in current session — equals / more than / less than N pages this session. E.g. only ask visitors who browsed 5+ pages — they know your store.

","Behavior targeting","product-targeting","

Show the survey only in the context of specific catalog items — by product, variant, collection, product tag, or product type. Exit-intent adds the cart condition: has product in cart / has empty cart.

","Product targeting","customer-targeting","

Target by who the customer is:

All customers — no restriction (default).
New customer / Return customer — first-time vs. repeat buyers.
Customer tags — match Shopify customer tags (e.g. vip, wholesale).
Order count — equals / more than / less than N orders.
Customer total spent — equals / more than / less than an amount.
Segments — match your Shopify customer segments.

","Customer targeting","cdd6f4d6a78a479190af68b67","Email Surveys","Automatic post-order survey emails: triggers, delays, audience, and testing.",[354,355,356,357,358],[224,353],"discount-rewards",{"_158":371,"_193":372,"_195":373},{"_158":368,"_193":369,"_195":370},{"_158":365,"_193":366,"_195":367},{"_158":362,"_193":363,"_195":364},{"_158":359,"_193":360,"_195":361},"delivery-history","

Every send is recorded with its status (success or failed), so you can verify customers actually receive surveys. If sends fail consistently, contact support via the in-app chat — we'll check the delivery setup with you.

","Monitoring delivery","customize-the-email","

The email is fully brandable per survey: subject line, body content, button text, colors, logo, and background. Before activating:

Click send test email and check it in your own inbox — links, logo, and rendering.
Open the survey from the test email and submit — confirm the response appears in Responses.

","Step 3 — Customize and test","audience-and-duplicates","

The email respects the survey's customer targeting (all / new / return customers, tags, order count, total spent) — only matching customers receive it. Set the block duplicate window so a customer who orders twice in a week isn't surveyed twice: within the window, repeat sends to the same customer are suppressed.

","Step 2 — Audience and duplicate protection","triggers-and-delay","

Pick the order event and the wait:

Trigger	Typical use	Suggested delay
Order fulfilled	Product feedback — wait until they've received and used it.	5–10 days
Order paid	Purchase-experience feedback while the memory is fresh.	Hours to 1 day
Order canceled	Understand why the order fell through.	Minutes to hours

The delay is expressed as N minutes, hours, or days after the event.

","Step 1 — Choose trigger and delay","how-email-surveys-work","

Enable the Email channel on a survey and the app emails eligible customers automatically after an order event. The email contains a button that opens the survey on a hosted page — one click, no login. Responses land in the same Analytics and Responses as every other channel.

","How email surveys work","c948f53390bb1fb3c76c4dd15","post-purchase-surveys","Thank You & Order Status Page Surveys","The highest-converting survey placement — how it works and how to use it well.",[381,382,383],[380,224],"survey-templates",{"_158":390,"_193":391,"_195":392},{"_158":387,"_193":388,"_195":389},{"_158":384,"_193":385,"_195":386},"targeting-post-purchase","

Post-purchase surveys support the full customer targeting. The classic split:

Survey A → New customers: \"How did you find us?\" (attribution).
Survey B → Return customers: \"What brought you back?\" (retention insight).

Each customer sees exactly one relevant survey instead of a generic one. See Targeting Rules for all conditions.

Keep it to 1–3 questions — the customer is on their way out. The prebuilt Post-purchase survey template is a solid starting point; trim it rather than extend it.

","Targeting by customer type","how-it-works","

The Order Status/Thankyou page channel renders your survey through a Shopify checkout extension — no theme code, no app embed needed. Configure where it appears:

Thank you page — immediately after checkout. Best response rates; ask your most important question here.
Order status page — the page customers revisit from order-confirmation emails. Reaches them again later, closer to delivery.
Or both.

This channel is enabled by default on new surveys.

","How it works","why-post-purchase","

The Thank you page is the single best place to ask \"How did you hear about us?\": the customer just completed a purchase, is still engaged, and self-reported attribution collected here is far more reliable than analytics guesswork (which loses signal to ad blockers and cross-device journeys). Post-purchase surveys routinely see the highest completion rates of any channel — often several times the on-site widget.

","Why survey after checkout?","cc0f35286787f3678b2926ed3","On-site Widget & Exit-Intent Surveys","Pages, timing, positions, and frequency rules — configured step by step.",[399,400,401,402],[224,398],"survey-appearance",{"_158":412,"_193":413,"_195":414},{"_158":409,"_193":410,"_195":411},{"_158":406,"_193":407,"_195":408},{"_158":403,"_193":404,"_195":405},"frequency","

The recurrence setting controls how often the same visitor sees the survey:

Option	Behavior	Use for
When the answer is not completed	Keeps showing until the visitor finishes.	Important surveys where you want every visitor's answer once.
Show only once	One impression per visitor, ever.	Minimal-annoyance surveys.
Always show	Every eligible page view.	Testing; rarely for production.
Stop after X attempts	Gives up after N impressions.	Balanced default.
Delay before reappearing	Waits N minutes/hours/days/weeks/months between shows.	Long-running always-on surveys.

Separately, max responses per customer caps how many times one person can submit.

","Frequency & repeat rules","exit-intent","

The Exit Intent channel triggers when the visitor moves to leave the store — the \"before you go\" moment. Its extra targeting is the cart condition:

Has product in cart → ask \"What stopped you from checking out?\" — you're diagnosing checkout hesitation.
Has empty cart → ask \"Couldn't find what you were looking for?\" — you're diagnosing discovery problems.

Create two exit-intent surveys with opposite cart conditions to cover both cases with the right question.

Exit intent is detected from cursor movement, so it behaves differently on touch devices — always test it on desktop first.

","Exit-intent surveys","timing","

Choose when the widget appears after page load: Show immediately, or X seconds after load (1–10, 15, or 20 seconds). A 3–5 second delay filters out bouncing visitors without losing engaged ones — recommended for most on-site surveys.

","Timing","onsite-widget","

Enable the Onsite Survey channel and choose:

Pages — Home page, Product pages, Collection pages, Cart page, Blog pages. New surveys target Home, Product, and Collection by default. Ask page-relevant questions: product-finding feedback on collections, \"anything missing?\" on product pages.
Position — Top/Bottom Left/Right or Center (Bottom Left default).
Styling — see Customizing Survey Appearance.

Remember: this channel requires the Ego Surveys app embed to be enabled in your theme.

","Setting up the on-site widget","cf836f556a123195ab2acab31","survey-channels-overview","Survey Channels Overview","The six ways a survey reaches customers — and how to choose.",[421,422],[326,327,375],{"_158":426,"_193":427,"_195":428},{"_158":423,"_193":424,"_195":425},"choosing-a-channel","

Marketing attribution, checkout feedback → Thank you page. The customer just bought — response rates here beat every other channel by a wide margin.
Website experience, conversion blockers → Onsite widget (browsing feedback) or Exit Intent (why they're leaving).
Product feedback after delivery → Email, triggered on Order fulfilled with a few days' delay so the product has arrived.
Social media, newsletters, QR codes, support follow-ups → Standalone Page link — works anywhere you can paste a URL.
A survey inside a specific page section → Embed Survey.

Start with one channel per survey. If you enable several, review the targeting on each so the same customer isn't asked twice in two places.

","Which channel for which job","six-channels","

One survey can publish to any combination of six channels; each keeps its own targeting, timing, and styling, and all responses land in the same analytics:

Channel	Where it appears	Default	Needs app embed?
Order Status/Thankyou page	Right after checkout — Thank you and/or Order status page.	Enabled	No
Onsite Survey	A widget on storefront pages you choose.	Enabled	Yes
Exit Intent	A widget when a visitor is about to leave.	Off	Yes
Standalone Page	A hosted page with a shareable link.	Off	No
Email	Sent automatically after an order event.	Off	No
Embed Survey	A code snippet you paste into your theme.	Off	No

","The six channels","c3fa31577caf28eb966dfcf89","Customizing Survey Appearance","Colors, backgrounds, logos, positions — styled per channel, with a live preview.",[435,436,437,438,439],[416,326],"Building Surveys",{"_158":452,"_193":453,"_195":454},{"_158":449,"_193":450,"_195":451},{"_158":446,"_193":447,"_195":448},{"_158":443,"_193":444,"_195":445},{"_158":440,"_193":441,"_195":442},"position","

On-site and exit-intent widgets can sit at Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left (default), Bottom Right, or Center. Bottom corners are least intrusive; Center demands attention — fitting for exit intent, annoying for browsing.

","Widget position","logos","

Add a header logo or side logo: upload an image and control its size and corner radius. Most impactful on standalone-page and email surveys, where the survey stands alone and needs your branding to feel trustworthy.

","Logos","answers-and-buttons","

Answer options have their own border radius, border size, and text color. Buttons are styled in two states — default and active — each with text, background, and border colors. Match the active state to your theme's accent color so selections feel native.

","Answers and buttons","widget-styling","

Start with the overall color theme, then fine-tune:

Borders — radius and size.
Text colors — header and description.
Background — solid color, gradient (from/to), or an image; optionally enable the glass effect for a frosted look over page content.
Progress bar color for multi-page surveys.

","The widget container","styling-per-channel","

Each channel (on-site widget, exit intent, thank-you page, standalone page, email, embed) carries its own style settings, so the same survey can look native in every placement — a compact widget on product pages, a full-page branded experience on the standalone link. All styling lives in the builder next to the channel settings, with a live desktop/mobile preview.

","Styling is per channel","c2a071216925d40ca941f2b25","Reward Customers with Discount Codes","Set up the Promo Code question — on-screen or email-gated — step by step.",[461,462,463,464],[460,327],"question-types",{"_158":474,"_193":475,"_195":476},{"_158":471,"_193":472,"_195":473},{"_158":468,"_193":469,"_195":470},{"_158":465,"_193":466,"_195":467},"show-discount-summary","

On earlier questions, enable Show discount summary so customers see from the start that a reward waits at the end — completion rates rise when the payoff is visible before question one.

","Announce the reward up front","deliver-by-email","

Turn on the Send email toggle to trade the reward for an email address: the customer enters their email and clicks Get coupon to receive the code. Enable Limit discount per email so the same address can't claim repeatedly.

Email-gating converts the survey into a list-building machine — you collect feedback and a contact in one interaction. Show the code on screen instead when friction matters more than the list (e.g. exit intent).

","Email-gated delivery","set-up-promo-code","

Create the discount first in your Shopify admin (Discounts → Create discount) — e.g. code THANKS10 for 10% off. The app displays the code; Shopify enforces it, so set usage limits there if needed (one per customer, minimum spend, expiry).
In the survey builder, add a Promo Code question (under Pages), typically after the last real question.
Enter the discount code. Customers see it in a copyable box with a Copy button.
Optionally add a button with custom text to continue or close the survey.

","Setting it up","why-offer-rewards","

A small discount dramatically lifts completion rates — especially for exit-intent and abandoned-checkout surveys, where the discount doubles as a save offer. Ego Surveys delivers rewards through the Promo Code question type, usually placed as the final step of the survey.

","Why offer a reward?","ce9546080d1bf3799cce581e9","Branching Logic & Actions","Route customers by their answers — and trigger emails and tags — with worked examples.",[482,483,484,485],[246,460],{"_158":495,"_193":496,"_195":497},{"_158":492,"_193":493,"_195":494},{"_158":489,"_193":490,"_195":491},{"_158":486,"_193":487,"_195":488},"examples","

NPS follow-up: if the NPS score is less than 7 → Go to the \"What went wrong?\" page; otherwise → End survey with the thank-you screen. Detractors get a voice; promoters get a short survey.
Win-back tagging: on \"Would a discount bring you back?\", if answer equals Yes → Add customer tag discount-interested. Then a Shopify Flow automation (or your email tool) sends the offer to that segment.
Support escalation: if \"Should our team reach out?\" equals Yes → Send email to the customer confirming, and Add order tag needs-follow-up so support sees it on the order.
Channel-specific deep-dive: if \"How did you find us?\" includes any of your paid channels → branch into ad-experience questions; organic visitors skip them.

","Worked examples","actions","

Action	What it does
Continue to next question	The default flow.
Go to specific question	Skip ahead or branch to a different page.
End survey	Finish early — skip questions that no longer apply.
Send email	Trigger an email to the customer.
Add customer tag	Tags the customer in Shopify — visible on the customer record, usable in segments, discounts, and Flow.
Add order tag	Tags the related order in Shopify.

","Available actions","conditions","

Compare the customer's answer with: is submitted, equals, not equals, contains, not contains, is greater than, is less than, is blank, is present, includes any, not includes any. Numeric operators (greater/less than) are what you'll use with NPS, Star Rating, and Slider questions.

","Available conditions","how-logic-works","

Branching logic makes the survey react to each answer. A rule = a condition about the answer + an action that fires when it matches. Rules are built visually in the survey's workflow editor, per page. Without rules, the survey simply runs page by page.

","How logic works","c7c32d0819c7355bb43bc3841","question-settings","Question Settings & Behavior","Per-question toggles and content fields — what each does and when to use it.",[504,505,506],[460,252],{"_158":513,"_193":514,"_195":515},{"_158":510,"_193":511,"_195":512},{"_158":507,"_193":508,"_195":509},"pages-and-flow","

Questions live on pages. Per page you set a title, a description, how many questions per page show at once, and the order (drag to rearrange). Multi-page surveys show a progress bar — its color is styled per channel in the appearance settings.

Keep on-site widget surveys short: one to three questions per page converts best. Save longer questionnaires for the standalone page or email channel, and open them with a Welcome Screen.

","Pages, order, and progress","content-fields","

Each question also has content fields: a heading (the question itself), an optional description (clarify what you're asking), the answer options, an input placeholder, and a max characters limit for text answers. Image Choice questions take an image per option with size, brightness, and border controls.

","Content fields","advanced-settings","

Every question has an advanced settings panel. Availability depends on the question type:

Setting	What it does	Tip
Required	The customer must answer before continuing.	Use sparingly — every required question costs completions.
Randomize	Shuffles answer options per respondent.	Turn on for attribution questions to avoid first-option bias.
Alphabetical order	Sorts options A→Z.	Good for long neutral lists.
Other option	Adds an \"Other\" answer with a free-text field.	Almost always worth enabling on choice questions.
Show label	Labels on scale endpoints (left / center / right).	Anchors the scale (\"Poor\" / \"Excellent\").
Multiple selection	Allow more than one pick on list-style questions.	—
Change layout	Button List & Image Choice: Vertical, 2 Columns, or 3 Columns.	2 columns fits most mobile screens best.
Show discount summary	Surfaces the reward summary on the question.	Use with Promo Code flows so customers know a reward awaits.

","Per-question settings","cacd97e7743438e31fcc27f7c","Question Types Reference","Every question type, its options, and which to pick for each job.",[522,523,524,525,526,527],"4 min",[499,353],{"_158":543,"_193":544,"_195":545},{"_158":540,"_193":541,"_195":542},{"_158":537,"_193":538,"_195":539},{"_158":534,"_193":535,"_195":536},{"_158":531,"_193":532,"_195":533},{"_158":528,"_193":529,"_195":530},"special-pages","

Welcome Screen — an intro page before the first question; use it on longer link/email surveys to set expectations (\"2 minutes, 5 questions\").
Statement — a text-only page for context or instructions, no answer required.
Promo Code — shows a discount code as a reward; see Reward Customers with Discount Codes.
Thank You — the closing screen after submission.
Redirect To URL — ends the survey by sending the customer to any URL (a collection page, a review platform…).
End Screen — a final screen variant to close the survey.

","Special pages","text-questions","

Single-line Answer and Multi-line Answer collect free text — set a placeholder and a max-character limit. Number accepts numeric input only. Date shows a date picker with a configurable format (default DD/MM/YYYY) and optional minimum/maximum dates.

","Text questions","contact-info","

Email, Phone Number (with an optional country-code selector), Address, and Website collect structured contact details. Use Email together with the Promo Code question to trade a discount for a subscriber (see Reward Customers with Discount Codes).

","Contact Info","rating-ranking","

Type	Scale & options
NPS	0–10 \"how likely are you to recommend us\". Analytics show the full score distribution and average. Add a follow-up \"why?\" via branching logic for low scores.
Star Rating	1–5 stars by default; optional labels for the left / center / right of the scale (\"Poor\" … \"Excellent\").
Ranked Choice	Customers order options by preference; analytics show each option's average rank.
Slider	Numeric slider, 1–100 by default, with configurable min, max, step increments (default 5), and starting position (left / center / right).

","Rating & Ranking","choice-questions","

Type	Best for
Single Choice	Pick exactly one option — attribution, preferences. The workhorse.
Multiple Choice	Pick several options (\"Which features do you use?\").
Binary Choice	Simple Yes/No decisions.
Dropdown	Long option lists (countries, 10+ choices) without cluttering the widget.
Button List	Options as tappable buttons; layouts: Vertical, 2 Columns, 3 Columns. Great on mobile.
Image Choice	Visual options with images (pick a style, a colorway); same layout options.
Consent	Explicit opt-in (marketing consent, terms).
Like/Dislike	Thumbs-up / thumbs-down verdicts per item.

","Choice questions","overview","

The question picker groups content into five families. Rule of thumb: closed questions (choice, rating) get more answers and chart automatically; open text gets richer insight but fewer responses. Lead with closed questions, end with one optional open question.

","Picking the right type","c5d5fb642ad9f4133b70eaed4","Survey Templates","Six ready-made starting points — what each is for and when to use it.",[553,554,555],[552,460],"Getting Started","create-your-first-survey",{"_158":562,"_193":563,"_195":564},{"_158":559,"_193":560,"_195":561},{"_158":556,"_193":557,"_195":558},"customize-after","

Templates are starting points, not cages: rewrite every question, add or remove questions, change question types, switch channels and targeting, and restyle the appearance — nothing is locked. The fastest path to a good survey is usually template → delete what you don't need → adjust wording to your brand voice.

","Customize after choosing","available-templates","

Template	Questions included	Use when you want to…
Post-purchase survey	How the customer found you, why they bought today, checkout experience rating, promo opt-in.	Measure marketing attribution and checkout UX. Pair with the Thank you page channel.
Exit intent survey	What stopped the visitor, would a discount bring them back, what to improve.	Understand why visitors leave without buying. Pair with the Exit Intent channel.
NPS survey	0–10 \"how likely to recommend\", reason for the score, updates opt-in.	Track overall customer satisfaction over time. Works well as an email survey after delivery.
Product feedback survey	Matched description?, quality rating, repurchase intent, open comments.	Improve product pages and catch quality issues early. Send by email days after fulfillment.
Abandoned checkout survey	Why the purchase wasn't completed, would a discount help, should support reach out.	Diagnose checkout friction.
Blank	—	Build your own from scratch.

","The templates and when to use them","template-gallery","

When you click Create new survey, Ego Surveys opens a template gallery. Every template is a complete, editable survey — questions, wording, and channel suggestions included. Pick the one closest to your goal; you'll customize everything afterwards.

","The template gallery","c71fc4284941292fe12905d0f","Create Your First Survey","A full walkthrough of the builder — from template to live survey, with a worked example.",[570,571,572,573,574,575],[460,416,375],{"_158":591,"_193":592,"_195":593},{"_158":588,"_193":589,"_195":590},{"_158":585,"_193":586,"_195":587},{"_158":582,"_193":583,"_195":584},{"_158":579,"_193":580,"_195":581},{"_158":576,"_193":577,"_195":578},"publish-and-preview","

Save, then set the survey's status to Active in the survey list. To test, place a small test order in your store — the survey appears right on the Thank you page. Your answer shows up under Responses within moments.

Manage surveys from the list at any time: filter All / Active / Inactive, and use the row actions to duplicate (great for A/B tests), delete, or change status.

","Step 5 — Activate and test","choose-channels","

In the channel settings, make sure Order Status/Thankyou page is enabled (it is by default on new surveys) and choose where it renders: the Thank you page, the Order status page, or both. Disable the Onsite Survey channel if you only want the post-purchase placement.

","Step 4 — Check the channel","add-questions","

Click Add content to open the question picker — 5 families: Choice, Rating & Ranking, Contact Info, Text, and Pages (see Question Types Reference). For our example:

Keep \"How did you hear about our store?\" as a Single Choice with your real channels (TikTok, Instagram, Google, a friend…).
Enable the Other option setting on it — the answers you didn't think of are often the most valuable.
Delete follow-up questions you don't need — shorter surveys complete better. One to three questions is the sweet spot for post-purchase.

","Step 3 — Adjust the questions","builder-overview","

A survey is organized into pages:

Each page has an optional title and description, holds one or more questions, and you set how many questions show per page.
Drag to reorder questions and pages.
The live preview on the right switches between Desktop, Mobile, and Fullscreen — check mobile before publishing, most responses come from phones.
A save bar tracks changes; nothing goes live until you save.

","Step 2 — Understand the builder","start-a-new-survey","

Go to Surveys → Create new survey. The template gallery opens; pick the Post-purchase survey template (it already contains \"How did you hear about our store?\" plus three follow-ups), or click Create from scratch for a blank survey. Either way the full-screen builder opens.

","Step 1 — Start from a template","example-goal","

As a worked example we'll build the classic attribution survey: \"How did you hear about us?\" shown on the Thank you page right after checkout — the highest-response placement there is. Every step adapts to any other survey.

","What we'll build","c7a63227323055f994b4aeb28","Installing & Activating Ego Surveys","Install the app, enable the app embed, and verify surveys can reach your customers.",[599,600,601,602,603],[552,380,182],{"_158":616,"_193":617,"_195":618},{"_158":613,"_193":614,"_195":615},{"_158":610,"_193":611,"_195":612},{"_158":607,"_193":608,"_195":609},{"_158":604,"_193":605,"_195":606},"verify-checklist","

☑ App embed shows Activated in the setup guide.
☑ At least one survey has status Active with at least one channel enabled.
☑ Visiting a targeted page in an incognito window shows the widget (respect the timing delay if you set one).
☑ Submitting a test response makes it appear under Responses.

","Quick verification checklist","setup-guide","

The Dashboard guide has three steps:

Activate app — done above.
Create your first survey — the button takes you to the survey builder; see Create Your First Survey for a walkthrough.
Visualize how it appears — Preview in store opens your storefront so you can see the survey live.

You can dismiss the guide at any time — it's just a checklist, dismissing changes nothing.

","Step 3 — Finish the setup guide","activate-the-app-embed","

On-site widget and exit-intent surveys are rendered by a theme app embed called Ego Surveys. Enable it once:

On the Dashboard setup guide, click Activate app — your Theme Editor opens on the App embeds panel.
Toggle Ego Surveys on.
Click Save in the Theme Editor.

The setup step flips to Activated once detected.

Only the on-site and exit-intent channels need the embed. Post-purchase, email, and link surveys work without it — so even before touching the theme you can run a Thank-you-page survey. Re-enable the embed whenever you publish a new theme.

","Step 2 — Activate the app embed","install-the-app","

Install Ego Surveys from the Shopify App Store and approve the permissions (customers, orders, products, themes, files — used for targeting rules, post-purchase triggers, and rendering the widget). The app opens in your Shopify admin with five sections:

Dashboard — setup guide, at-a-glance stats.
Surveys — create and manage surveys.
Responses — browse and export individual answers.
Analytics — charts and metrics per survey.
Integrations — Shopify Flow, Google Sheets, and more.

","Step 1 — Install the app","what-is-ego-surveys","

Ego Surveys collects customer feedback directly inside your Shopify store. The full loop:

You build a survey — questions, look & feel, and rules for who sees it.
It reaches customers through one or more channels: a widget on store pages, an exit-intent prompt, the Thank you / Order status page after checkout, an automatic email after an order, a shareable link, or an embedded block.
Responses flow into Analytics (response rates, per-question charts) and the Responses browser.
Optionally, responses sync to Google Sheets in real time and trigger Shopify Flow automations.

","What is Ego Surveys?","mob-art-developer-account-access","developer-account-access","Developer Account Access Invitation Guide","If you choose to submit your mobile app using your own Apple Developer or Google Play Developer account, you will need to grant access to the Ego Mobile…",[629,630,631,632,633],"Jun 30, 2026",[],"mobile-app-builder","Ego Mobile App Builder","App Submission",{"_158":543,"_193":646,"_195":647},{"_158":643,"_193":644,"_195":645},{"_158":640,"_193":641,"_195":642},{"_158":637,"_193":638,"_195":639},{"_158":634,"_193":635,"_195":636},"important-notes","

You retain full ownership of your developer accounts.
Access granted through invitations can be modified or removed anytime.
Always ensure the email address you invite is provided by the official Ego Mobile Builder team.

If the invitation has not been accepted yet, you can resend it from the Users and Access or Users and Permissions section of your developer account.

","Important Notes","after-sending-the-invitations","

Once both invitations are accepted:

The Ego Mobile Builder team will be able to:
Configure your app listing
Upload app builds
Manage store metadata
Submit the app for review

You can continue managing your account and revoke or modify permissions at any time.

","After Sending the Invitations","2-invite-access-to-google-play-console","

Before You Start

Make sure that:

You have an active Google Play Developer account
You have Owner or Admin access
You have the email address provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team

Google Play uses the Play Console to manage apps and permissions.

Step 1: Log in to Google Play Console

Go to https://play.google.com/console
Sign in with your Google Play Developer account

Step 2: Open Users and Permissions

In the left navigation menu, open Users and Permissions
This page displays all users who have access to your developer account

$\"\"$

Step 3: Invite a New User

Click Invite New User
Enter the email address provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team: <supportopusecom@gmail.com>

$\"\"$

Step 4: Assign Permissions

Grant the necessary permissions for app submission and management.

Common permissions include:

Release Manager
App Manager
Store Listing management
Production releases
Testing management

Depending on the platform requirements, you may grant broader access such as Admin, or limited access specifically for app release tasks.

$\"\"$

Step 5: Send the Invitation

Review the selected permissions
Click Invite User

The invited user will receive an email invitation and can access your Play Console once they accept the invitation.

$\"\"$

","2. Invite Access to Google Play Console","1-invite-access-to-apple-app-store-connect","

Before You Start

Make sure that:

You have an active Apple Developer account
You have Admin or Account Holder permissions
You know the email address provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team

Apple manages app publishing through App Store Connect, where collaborators can be invited.

Step 1: Log in to App Store Connect

Go to https://appstoreconnect.apple.com
Sign in using your Apple Developer account

Step 2: Open Users and Access

From the dashboard, click Users and Access
You will see the list of current users with access to your account

Step 3: Add a New User

Click the + (Add User) button
Enter the following information:

First Name
Last Name
Email Address (the email provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team): <support@opusecom.co>

$\"\"$

Step 4: Assign Roles

Assign the appropriate role so the team can manage submission tasks.

Recommended roles typically include:

Admin (full access - recommended for submission tasks)

If requested by the platform, also ensure access is granted to:

App management
TestFlight
App submission and metadata editing

$\"\"$

Step 5: Send the Invitation

Review the role permissions
Click Invite

Apple will send an invitation email to the provided address. Once accepted, the invited user will be able to access your App Store Connect account according to the assigned permissions.

$\"\"$

","1. Invite Access to Apple App Store Connect","

Overview

If you choose to submit your mobile app using your own Apple Developer or Google Play Developer account, you will need to grant access to the Ego Mobile Builder team so they can help configure and submit the app on your behalf.

This access is granted by inviting an email address to your developer account with the appropriate permissions.

This guide explains how to invite a collaborator to:

Apple App Store Connect: <support@opusecom.co>
Google Play Console: <supportopusecom@gmail.com>

","Overview","mob-art-app-submission-guide","app-submission-guide","App Submission User Guide","The Submission section guides you through the process of publishing your mobile app after your design is ready. This flow starts after you have created at…",[655,656,657,658,659,660,661,662],"8 min",[],{"_158":543,"_193":684,"_195":647},{"_158":681,"_193":682,"_195":683},{"_158":678,"_193":679,"_195":680},{"_158":675,"_193":676,"_195":677},{"_158":672,"_193":673,"_195":674},{"_158":669,"_193":670,"_195":671},{"_158":666,"_193":667,"_195":668},{"_158":663,"_193":664,"_195":665},"common-issues-and-what-to-check","

Submission cannot proceed

Check whether:

At least one app design has been created
Required listing fields are completed
Required images and URLs are provided
The selected submission account is properly connected

Update does not go live immediately

Check whether:

The change requires store re-submission
The current update is waiting for review
The latest version has already been submitted

Re-submission is required unexpectedly

This may happen when the change affects:

app package behavior
permissions
native components
store-managed metadata or assets

Review the update scope and proceed through the re-submission flow.

","Common Issues and What to Check","best-practices-for-submission","

Complete and review app design before starting submission
Prepare Apple and Google listing assets in advance
Use accurate, polished store descriptions
Keep screenshots updated after major UI changes
Understand which submission account type you are using
Review whether a change is content-only or version-impacting before publishing

","Best Practices for Submission","common-scenarios","

Scenario 1: First Launch of a New App

User creates first app design
User enters store listing details
User chooses developer account type
User submits the app for the first time

Scenario 2: Updating Banner Content Only

User edits home screen banner or promotional section
System checks update type
If allowed by architecture, update may go live without store re-submission

Scenario 3: Updating Native App Features

User enables a feature that changes the app package or native behavior
System requires a new submission
User reviews updated metadata and submits a new version

","Common Scenarios","recommended-submission-workflow","

A recommended workflow is:

Finalize App Design
Complete Branding and Navigation
Test using Ego Live Preview
Enter Apple and Google listing information
Choose the submission account type
Submit the app
For future changes, check whether the update needs:
direct publishing, or
re-submission

This helps reduce publishing errors and keeps the submission process organized.

","Recommended Submission Workflow","3-re-submission-flow-for-changes-that-require-a-new-submissi","

When to Use This Flow

Use the re-submission flow when changes made to the app require a new store submission and approval.

This usually happens when the update affects areas that Apple or Google need to review again.

Examples may include:

Updating the app binary
Changing app-level permissions
Modifying core native functionality
Updating important store listing assets
Releasing a new app version

Typical Re-Submission Flow

Published App → Make Changes → System Detects Submission Required → Review Updated Information → Submit New Version

Step 1: Identify Submission-Required Changes

After editing the app, the system may mark the update as requiring re-submission.

The user should see that the current update cannot go live immediately and must go through the submission process again.

Step 2: Review the Updated Submission Information

Before re-submitting, review all affected details.

This may include:

Updated design assets
Updated screenshots
Updated descriptions or release notes
New app version information
Account and publishing details

If the change affects only one store, the system may still require confirmation for both store configurations depending on the publishing setup.

Step 3: Confirm Submission Method

The submission method may remain the same as the original setup:

User’s own developer account
Ego Mobile Builder account

Make sure the selected account is still valid and properly connected before re-submitting.

Step 4: Submit the Updated Version

Once everything is reviewed, submit the updated version.

After submission:

The new version enters store review
The current live version usually remains available until the new version is approved and released
Status tracking should show the latest submission stage

Possible Statuses During Re-Submission

Depending on the platform, statuses may include:

Draft
Ready for Submission
Submitted
In Review
Approved
Rejected
Requires Changes
Published

","3. Re-Submission Flow for Changes That Require a New Submission","2-update-changes-on-the-ego-mobile-builder","

When to Use This Flow

Use the update flow when your app is already published and you want to make changes to the live app.

Examples include:

Updating app design content
Changing banners or branding assets
Updating navigation structure
Adjusting app listing content
Releasing feature improvements or fixes

Not all updates require a full re-submission to the app stores. Some changes may be applied directly, while others may require a new review.

Typical Update Flow

Existing Published App → Make Changes → Review Change Type → Apply Update or Submit New Version

Step 1: Make Your Changes

The user updates one or more parts of the app, such as:

App Design
Branding
Navigation
Notification-related display content
App listing information
App configuration

Step 2: Determine Whether the Change Requires Submission

After changes are made, the platform will typically determine whether the update can be:

Published directly without store re-submission, or
Sent through a new submission flow

Changes That May Not Require Re-Submission

These often include content or configuration changes managed remotely, depending on platform architecture.

Examples may include:

Home screen content updates
Promotional banners
Collection arrangement
Some text or image changes
Certain navigation or layout adjustments

Changes That May Require Re-Submission

These usually involve app package changes, store metadata changes, permissions, or native app-level updates.

Examples may include:

Native feature changes
App binary update
Permission changes
App icon changes
Splash screen changes in some cases
Store listing fields that require new store review
SDK or integration updates

Step 3: Apply the Update

If the change does not require re-submission:

Save and publish the update
The updated content may appear in the app without a new store release, depending on app architecture

If the change does require re-submission:

Continue to the re-submission flow described below

Best Practices for Updates

Review the type of change before publishing
Keep screenshots and listing metadata aligned with the app’s current design
Test updates in preview before release
Avoid making multiple major changes at once unless necessary

","2. Update Changes on the Ego Mobile Builder","1-first-time-submission-flow","

When to Use This Flow

Use the first-time submission flow when:

You have completed your first app design
Your app has not been published to the Apple App Store or Google Play yet
You are ready to submit your mobile app for the first time

Entry Point

The submission flow starts from App Design, after the user has successfully created and saved at least one app design.

Typical flow:

App Design → Submission → App Listing Information → Submission Account Selection → Review & Submit

Step 1: Complete Your App Design

Before starting submission, make sure your app design is ready.

You should already have:

A completed app design
Branding configured
Navigation configured
Required screens and content reviewed
Preview checked

Once the design is ready, continue to the Submission step.

Step 2: Enter App Listing Information

In this step, you provide the store listing details required for publishing to:

Apple App Store
Google Play

These details are used for your app’s public store page.

Typical App Listing Information

You may need to provide:

App name
App subtitle or short description
Full app description
App icon
Screenshots
Promotional images if required
Category
Support URL
Privacy Policy URL
Contact information
Version notes if applicable

Because Apple and Google may require different metadata, the system may separate the listing setup into:

Apple Listing
Google Listing

Best Practices

Use clear, customer-friendly store descriptions
Ensure your screenshots match the current app design
Keep branding consistent across icon, screenshots, and descriptions
Double-check spelling, formatting, and URLs

$\"\"$

Step 3: Choose the Submission Account Type

After entering the app listing information, you will choose how the app should be submitted.

There are typically two submission options:

Option A: Submit Using the User’s Own Developer Account

Choose this option when the merchant or app owner wants the app to be published under their own:

Apple Developer account
Google Play Developer account

Common Reasons to Use This Option

The user wants full ownership of the app listing
The user wants the app published under their own brand account
The user wants direct control over app store access, billing, and release management

What May Be Required

Developer account access or invitation
Store credentials or permissions
Required legal or business information already prepared in those accounts

Option B: Submit Using the Ego Mobile Builder Account

Choose this option when the app will be submitted using the platform’s managed submission account.

Common Reasons to Use This Option

The user does not have their own developer account
The user wants a faster or simpler publishing workflow
Submission and publishing are managed by the Ego Mobile Builder platform

Important Note

In this setup, the submission process, ownership structure, and access model may depend on the platform’s publishing policy. Users should clearly understand which parts are managed by the platform and which parts remain editable by the user.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Review Submission Details

Before final submission, review all information carefully.

This usually includes:

App design selected for submission
Listing details for Apple and Google
Developer account method
Branding assets
Screenshots and icon
Required legal links and contact details

Review Checklist

Before clicking submit, confirm that:

The app design is finalized
All listing information is complete
Screenshots are correct and up to date
The correct account option is selected
Privacy Policy and support links are valid
All required fields are filled in

$\"\"$

Step 5: Submit the App

Once the review is complete, submit the app.

After submission:

The app enters the publishing workflow
The status may change to something like In Review, Submitted, or Processing
Additional action may still be required depending on the selected account type and store requirements

$\"\"$

Expected Outcome

After the first submission:

The app is prepared and sent for store submission
Apple App Store and Google Play review processes begin
The user can track the submission status from the platform

","1. First-Time Submission Flow","

Overview

The Submission section guides you through the process of publishing your mobile app after your design is ready. This flow starts after you have created at least one App Design and are ready to move forward with store submission.

Depending on your app status and the type of changes made, the submission process may include:

First-time submission for a new app
Updating content or configuration on an existing app
Re-submitting the app when store approval is required again

This guide explains each flow and when to use it.

","mob-art-notification-configuration","notification-configuration","Notification Configuration","The Notification section allows you to create, manage, and deliver push notifications to your app users. Notifications help you drive engagement, promote…",[692,693,694],[],"Notifications",{"_158":543,"_193":701,"_195":647},{"_158":698,"_193":699,"_195":700},{"_158":695,"_193":696,"_195":697},"2-automated-notification","

What is Automated Notification?

Automated Notification allows you to send notifications automatically based on specific triggers, events, or user behaviors. This helps you maintain engagement without sending every message manually.

Automated notifications are useful for lifecycle communication and retention campaigns.

Examples:

Welcome notification after app install
Reminder for abandoned cart
Order status updates
Re-engagement notifications for inactive users
Promotion reminders based on timing or behavior

Common Use Cases

Typical automated notifications may include:

Welcome notification

Sent after a user installs or opens the app for the first time

Abandoned cart reminder

Sent when a user adds products to cart but does not complete checkout

Back-in-stock alert

Sent when an interested product becomes available again

Promotional campaign reminder

Sent automatically during a sales period

Inactive user reminder

Sent to users who have not opened the app for a defined period

Order and delivery updates

Sent based on order lifecycle events if supported

What You Can Configure

When setting up an automated notification, you may be able to define:

Automation name
Trigger condition
Target audience
Notification content
Delay timing
Redirect destination
Active / inactive status

Some systems may also support:

Frequency limits
Trigger filters
Sending windows
Exclusion rules

How to Create an Automated Notification

Go to Notification

$\"\"$

Click Create Notification

$\"\"$

Click “Create” in the Automated section

$\"\"$

Enter a name for the automation
Select the trigger type
Define the target audience or conditions
Write the notification title and message
Set the redirect destination
Configure timing or delay rules
Review the automation
Activate the automation

Trigger and Timing Logic

Automated notifications are usually triggered by system events or user actions. Depending on the feature set, you may define rules such as:

Send immediately after a trigger
Send after a delay
Send only once per user
Send only during certain time windows
Exclude users who already completed a certain action

Example:

Trigger: User added item to cart
Condition: No purchase completed
Delay: 2 hours
Action: Send abandoned cart reminder

Best Practices for Automated Notifications

Use automation for recurring lifecycle messages
Make the content relevant to the trigger
Avoid sending duplicate or excessive reminders
Use timing carefully so the message feels helpful, not intrusive
Review automation performance regularly
Pause or update underperforming automations when needed

Example

Automation name: Abandoned Cart Reminder Trigger: Cart created but checkout not completed Delay: 2 hours Message: You left something behind. Complete your purchase before it’s gone. Redirect: Cart page

","2. Automated Notification","1-manual-notification","

What is Manual Notification?

Manual Notification allows you to create and send a notification manually whenever needed. This is useful for one-time campaigns, flash sales, urgent announcements, product launches, or seasonal promotions.

Examples:

New collection launch
Limited-time discount
Holiday campaign
Storewide sale
Important service update

What You Can Configure

When creating a manual notification, you can usually configure:

Notification title
Message body
Image or banner (if supported)
Target audience
Redirect destination
Send timing

Depending on the system, you may also be able to:

Schedule the notification for later
Send a test notification
Preview how the notification will appear

How to Create a Manual Notification

Go to Notification

$\"\"$

Click Create Notification

$\"\"$

Click “Create” in the Manual section

$\"\"$

Enter the notification title

$\"\"$

Enter the message content

$\"\"$

Upload an image (If needed)

$\"\"$

Select the target audience
Choose whether to send now or schedule for later

$\"\"$

Choose the redirect action or destination

$\"\"$

Review the content and click Send test or Save

Send test: The notification is pushed to the app preview so the merchant can review how it appears.
Save: The notification is saved to the system and sent to the merchant’s customers.

$\"\"$

Redirect Options

A manual notification can usually redirect users to a specific location inside the app, such as:

Home page
Collection page
Product detail page
Custom page
Promotion page
Cart
External link

Choose a destination that matches the purpose of the notification so users can take action immediately after opening it.

Best Practices for Manual Notifications

Keep the title short and clear
Use concise, action-oriented copy
Highlight one main message only
Make sure the redirect destination matches the message
Avoid sending too many notifications in a short period
Test the notification before sending to all users

Example

Title: New Summer Collection Message: Explore our latest summer styles and shop your favorites now. Redirect: Summer Collection page

","1. Manual Notification","

Overview

The Notification section allows you to create, manage, and deliver push notifications to your app users. Notifications help you drive engagement, promote products, announce campaigns, and bring customers back to your app.

This section typically includes three main areas:

Manual Notification – send one-time notifications manually
Automated Notification – create notifications triggered by predefined events or rules
Segment – define and target specific groups of users

Using these features together helps you deliver more relevant messages to the right audience at the right time.

","mob-art-promote-your-app","promote-your-app","Bring Your App to Your Users' Attention","Our platform offers several promotion methods that allow you to showcase your app across different touchpoints in your store. These tools are designed to…",[709],[],"Settings",{"_158":543,"_193":710,"_195":647},"

Overview

Our platform offers several promotion methods that allow you to showcase your app across different touchpoints in your store. These tools are designed to help you maximize visibility with minimal setup effort.

Promoting your mobile app effectively is key to increasing installs and engaging your customers. We provide multiple built-in tools to help you bring your app directly to users at the right moments.

How it works

Follow these steps to manage and optimize your app promotion:

Access the Ego Mobile Builder

$\"\"$

Navigate to Settings

$\"\"$

Enable or customize the features you want to use

3.1. Quick enable promotions (no setup required)

These features are pre-configured and ready to use
Simply toggle Enable to activate

Example: App Install Bar

$\"\"$

3.2. Customizable promotions (require setup)

These features require content or display rule configuration
You can edit text, images, timing, and targeting conditions

Example: Footer Download CTA Block

$\"\"$

Setting & click Save to apply changes

$\"\"$

Available promotion methods

You can leverage multiple channels to promote your app:

In-app Review Prompt
Footer Download CTA Block
Storefront App Download
App Install Bar
Post-Checkout Download Block
App Install CTA on Thank You Page
Custom Install Popup
Smart banners
In-app messages
Embedded promotional sections in your storefront

Tip for better performance

Improve conversion rates with these tips:

Use strong and clear call-to-action (e.g., Download now, Get the app)
Highlight key benefits such as exclusive deals or faster checkout
Control display frequency to avoid overwhelming users

Best Practices

For long-term effectiveness:

Regularly test and optimize different promotion formats
Track user engagement and adjust your strategy accordingly
Keep your app store links updated and functional
Align promotions with campaigns, sales, or special events

Note

The Download Popup is already activated for you. You can preview how it appears to users and customize its content or display conditions anytime in the settings.

","mob-art-activate-app-embed","activate-app-embed","Activate & Save App Embed","This feature allows you to activate the Ego Mobile Builder app embed within your theme settings. Once enabled and saved, your mobile app will be properly…",[718],"1 min",[],{"_158":543,"_193":719,"_195":647},"

Overview

This feature allows you to activate the Ego Mobile Builder app embed within your theme settings. Once enabled and saved, your mobile app will be properly connected and ready to be promoted to customers.

Prerequisites

Before activating the app embed, make sure:

Your mobile app has been set up in the Ego Mobile Builder
You have access to your store’s theme settings
Required permissions to edit and save theme configurations

Setup Instructions

Step 1: Access Ego Mobile Builder

Go to Ego Mobile Builder from your admin dashboard

$\"\"$

Step 2: Activate Ego Mobile Builder

Locate the Ego Mobile Builder toggle
Turn it ON to enable the app embed

$\"\"$

Step 3: Save Changes

Click Save to apply the changes
The app embed is now activated and ready for use

$\"\"$

Best Practices

Always click Save after making any changes—unsaved settings will not be applied
Avoid frequent toggling ON/OFF as it may affect user experience
Monitor app performance and customer engagement after activation
Plan a soft launch before promoting widely to customers

","mob-art-forgot-password-notification","forgot-password-notification","Forgot Password Notification Setup Guide","The Forgot Password Notification feature allows you to update your Shopify forgot password email so customers are directed to the correct password reset…",[726],[],{"_158":543,"_193":727,"_195":647},"

1. Overview

The Forgot Password Notification feature allows you to update your Shopify forgot password email so customers are directed to the correct password reset flow for your mobile app.

This setup helps ensure that the password recovery experience works properly between Shopify and your mobile app.

2. Where to Set It Up

You will need to configure this in 2 places:

Ego Mobile Builder: to get the code or URL you need
Shopify Notifications: to update the forgot password email template

3. Standard Setup Flow

Step 1: Open Forgot Password Notification settings in Ego Mobile Builder

Go to Ego Mobile Builder
Open Settings
Select Forgot Password Notification

The system will display the code or URL you need for the email template.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Copy the code shown in the settings

Copy the full code snippet displayed in the setting screen

Notes:

Make sure to copy the entire content

$\"\"$

Step 3: Open Shopify Notifications

Click “Open Shopify Notifications” in settings and find the email notification related to Forgot password or Customer account reset

$\"\"$

Step 4: Paste the code and save

Open the corresponding email template
Paste the code copied from Ego Mobile Builder into the required location
Click Save

$\"\"$

Notes:

Make sure you do not accidentally remove other important parts of the email template
After saving, the updated template will be used for forgot password emails

Step 5: Preview

Use the Preview function in Shopify Notifications

$\"\"$

Check that:
The email content displays correctly
The reset password link is correct
The layout is not broken

4. Special Case: If the email template has already been customized

If you have already customized the email template in Shopify Notifications, you do not need to replace the entire template.

Instead, only update the reset password link by following these steps:

Step 1: Find this text in your existing email template and copy it:

Find the current reset password text or URL in your existing email template.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Replace it with the URL below:

Replace the existing reset password URL with the URL provided in the Forgot Password Notification setting in Ego Mobile Builder.

Step 3: Save

Click Save to apply the changes

Notes:

Only replace the required URL
Keep the rest of your customized email template unchanged to preserve your branding and existing content

5. Best Practices

Back up your template before editing

Before making any changes:

Copy your current email template
Save it in a note or backup file

This makes it easier to restore the original version if needed.

Replace only what is necessary

If your email template is already customized:

Only replace the reset password URL
Do not replace the full template unless necessary

This helps preserve:

Branding
Layout
Existing custom content

Verify the link carefully

After updating the template:

Double-check that the URL was pasted correctly
Make sure there are no extra spaces
Make sure no characters are missing

Even a small error in the URL can break the password reset flow.

Always test with Preview

After saving:

Always preview the email
Check both the email content and the reset password link

If possible, send a test email to verify the full end-to-end flow.

6. Expected Outcome

After the setup is completed:

Forgot password emails will use the correct reset link for your mobile app
Customers will be guided through the correct password recovery flow
The risk of incorrect redirects or broken reset flows will be reduced

###

","mob-art-headless-configuration","headless-configuration","Headless Configuration Guide","Headless configuration allows your mobile app to connect directly with Shopify Customer Account API, enabling passwordless login (OTP / magic link). This…",[734],[],{"_158":543,"_193":735,"_195":647},"

1. Overview

Headless configuration allows your mobile app to connect directly with Shopify Customer Account API, enabling passwordless login (OTP / magic link). This helps reduce friction and improve conversion rates.

2. Prerequisites

Before getting started, make sure:

Your store is using Customer Accounts (New version)
You have Admin access to the Shopify store
You can access the Ego Mobile Builder Dashboard

3. Setup Instructions

Step 1: Enable Headless in Shopify

Go to Shopify App Store
Install Headless

$\"\"$

👉 If you don’t see this option, your store may not support it or Customer Accounts (new version) is not enabled.

Step 2: Create Storefront API

In the Headless page
Click Create Storefront

$\"\"$

✅ Result:

A Storefront API is created for your mobile app connection

Step 3: Access Customer Account API

In the Headless page
Locate Customer Account API
Click Manage

$\"\"$

Step 4: Configure Client Type

In the Customer Account API settings:
Select Client type = Confidential

$\"\"$

In Application setup, locate Callback URI(s) (required)
Add the following URL:

https://mobile.opusecom.co/api/v1/auth-store/callback

$\"\"$

Ensure the URL is entered correctly (no extra spaces or typos)

📌 Explanation:

A Confidential client allows the use of a Client Secret, which is required for secure authentication in mobile apps

Step 5: Save & Retrieve Credentials

Click Save
The system will display:
Client ID
Client Secret

$\"\"$

⚠️ Important:

The Client Secret is shown only once
Save it immediately (recommended: password manager or secure vault)

Step 6: Configure in Ego Mobile Builder

Go to Ego Mobile Builder Dashboard
Navigate to Settings → Customer Account → No-password Login
Enter:
Client ID
Client Secret
Click Save

$\"\"$

","mob-art-preview-app","preview-app","Preview App User Guide","The Ego Mobile Preview allows you to view your app design on a real mobile device before submitting your app to the App Store or Google Play.",[743,744,745,746,747,748,749,750,751,752,753,754],[],"Design & Customize",{"_158":543,"_193":786,"_195":647},{"_158":783,"_193":784,"_195":785},{"_158":780,"_193":781,"_195":782},{"_158":777,"_193":778,"_195":779},{"_158":774,"_193":775,"_195":776},{"_158":771,"_193":772,"_195":773},{"_158":768,"_193":769,"_195":770},{"_158":765,"_193":766,"_195":767},{"_158":762,"_193":763,"_195":764},{"_158":759,"_193":760,"_195":761},{"_158":634,"_193":758,"_195":636},{"_158":755,"_193":756,"_195":757},"recommended-workflow","

A typical workflow when building your app is:

Create your app design
Configure branding and navigation
Open Ego Live Preview
Scan the QR code with the preview app
Test your design on a real device
Make adjustments if needed
Proceed to App Submission

Using the preview app regularly during development helps ensure your mobile app delivers a smooth and polished experience.

","Recommended Workflow","

The preview app is intended for testing and reviewing design only.
It does not represent the final published app version.
Some features that require live integrations may behave differently in preview mode.
Always review your app thoroughly before moving to the Submission step.

","common-issues-and-solutions","

QR Code Cannot Be Scanned

Check the following:

Your device camera has permission enabled
The QR code is clearly visible
The device has internet access
The preview app is updated to the latest version

Try scanning the QR code again if the connection fails.

Preview Does Not Load the Latest Design

If your preview shows an older design:

Confirm that your changes were saved
Refresh the preview in the preview app
Re-scan the QR code if necessary

Preview App Cannot Connect

Possible causes include:

Internet connectivity issues
Expired QR code session
Builder session timeout

Generate a new QR code and scan again.

","Common Issues and Solutions","best-practices-for-testing","

To get the most accurate preview experience:

Test on a real mobile device
Navigate through multiple screens
Check button interactions and scrolling behavior
Verify images and banners load correctly
Ensure text and typography are readable
Review navigation menus and tabs

Testing your design thoroughly helps avoid issues before app submission.

","Best Practices for Testing","when-to-use-the-ego-live-preview","

You should use the preview app during these stages:

After creating your initial app design
After updating branding or navigation
When testing layout or UI changes
Before starting the app submission process

Previewing your design helps ensure the final app experience matches your expectations.

","When to Use the Ego Live Preview","step-5-update-and-refresh-your-design","

If you make changes to your design in the Ego Mobile Builder, you can refresh the preview to see the updated version.

Typical workflow:

Update the design in the builder
Save your changes
Refresh the preview inside the preview app

Your preview will update to reflect the latest design.

","Step 5: Update and Refresh Your Design","step-4-explore-your-app-design","

After scanning the QR code, your app will open in preview mode.

You can now interact with the app just like a real user would.

Things you can review include:

Home screen layout
Navigation flow
Product listing pages
Product detail pages
Branding elements (colors, typography, icons)
Banners and promotional sections
Menu and navigation components

This preview allows you to test the real mobile experience before submitting your app.

","Step 4: Explore Your App Design","step-3-scan-the-qr-code","

Now use your mobile device to connect to the design.

Open the Ego Live Preview on your phone
Tap Scan QR Code
Use your device camera to scan the QR code displayed in the builder

Once the QR code is scanned successfully, the preview app will load your app design automatically.

$\"\"$

","Step 3: Scan the QR Code","step-2-open-the-preview-section-in-the-builder","

Next, return to the Ego Mobile Builder on your computer.

Go to Preview App inside the platform
Select the design you want to preview
The system will generate a QR code

This QR code connects your preview app to your current app design.

$\"\"$

","Step 2: Open the Preview Section in the Builder","step-1-download-the-ego-live-preview","

To view your app preview, you first need to install the Ego Live Preview on your mobile device.

For iOS Devices

Open the Apple App Store
Search for Ego Live Preview
Install the preview app on your device

For Android Devices

Open Google Play
Search for Ego Live Preview
Install the preview app

Once the app is installed, open it on your mobile device.

","Step 1: Download the Ego Live Preview","before-you-start","

Before using the preview app, make sure that:

You have created at least one app design
Your design has been saved in the Ego Mobile Builder
You have access to a mobile device (iOS or Android)
Your device has internet access

","Before You Start","

Overview

The Ego Mobile Preview allows you to view your app design on a real mobile device before submitting your app to the App Store or Google Play.

After creating your app design in the Ego Mobile Builder, you can use the Ego Live Preview to:

Experience your app layout on a real device
Test navigation and UI behavior
Review branding, colors, and typography
Check product display and content structure
Validate the overall mobile shopping experience

The preview app connects to your design through a QR code, making it quick and easy to test your app anytime during development.

","mob-art-navigation-configuration","navigation-configuration","Navigation Configuration","Navigation defines how users move between different areas of your mobile app. A clear navigation structure improves usability and helps customers easily…",[793,794],[],{"_158":798,"_193":799,"_195":800},{"_158":795,"_193":796,"_195":797},"preview-your-navigation","

After updating navigation settings:

Open Ego Live Preview
Test the app flow
Check how the navigation works
Confirm typography readability
Verify splash screen appearance

This helps ensure your design and navigation work smoothly before submitting your app.

","Preview Your Navigation","navigation-settings","

Navigation defines how users move between different areas of your mobile app. A clear navigation structure improves usability and helps customers easily find products and content.

Navigation settings usually include:

Header
Side Menu
Bottom Navigation Bar

Header Configuration

The Header appears at the top of most screens in your app. It typically contains essential navigation and quick-access functions.

Common Header Elements

You may configure the following elements:

App logo/ App name
Cart icon

How to Configure Header

Go to App Design
Select Navigation
Open Header
Configure the available elements
Enable or disable specific icons
Save your settings

$\"\"$

Best Practices

Keep the header simple and uncluttered
Ensure icons are clear and easy to tap

Side Menu

The Side Menu (also known as a drawer menu) provides access to additional pages and categories within your app.

It usually appears when users tap the menu icon in the header.

What You Can Add to the Side Menu

Common menu items include:

Home
Shop / Collections
Orders
Account
Custom pages

How to Configure Side Menu

Go to App Design
Open Navigation
Select Side Menu
Add or remove menu items
Reorder menu items by priority
Save the configuration

$\"\"$

Best Practices

Keep the menu structure simple
Place the most important pages near the top
Avoid adding too many navigation items

Bottom Navigation Bar

The Bottom Navigation Bar is one of the most important navigation components in a mobile app. It allows users to quickly switch between key sections.

Typical Bottom Navigation Items

Most apps include between 3 and 5 navigation tabs, such as:

Home
Search
Collection/ Products
Notifications
Account

Each tab usually contains:

An icon
A label

How to Configure Bottom Navigation

Go to App Design
Select Navigation
Open Bottom Bar
Add or edit navigation tabs
Assign each tab to navigate to a specific screen or product.
Customize the icon and label
Save the configuration

$\"\"$

Best Practices

Limit the bottom bar to 3–5 tabs
Use clear icons and short labels
Keep the most important features easily accessible
Maintain consistent icon styles

","Navigation Settings","mob-art-branding-configuration","branding-configuration","Branding Configuration","The Branding section allows you to configure key visual elements that define the identity of your mobile app. These settings help ensure your app reflects…",[807],[],{"_158":543,"_193":808,"_195":647},"

Branding Settings

The Branding section allows you to configure key visual elements that define the identity of your mobile app. These settings help ensure your app reflects your brand consistently across all screens.

Branding configuration typically includes:

Typography
Splash Screen

Typography

Typography controls how text appears throughout your mobile app. Setting consistent typography helps improve readability and create a professional user experience.

What You Can Configure

You can typically customize the following:

Primary font – the main font used across the app
Heading styles – fonts used for titles and section headers
Font sizes – adjust text hierarchy across headings and body text
Font weight – control boldness of text elements

These settings apply globally across your app to maintain visual consistency.

How to Configure Typography

Go to App Design
Open Branding
Select Typography
Choose the font family for your app
Adjust heading and body text settings
Save your changes

$\"\"$

Best Practices

Use one primary font family for a consistent design.
Ensure text contrast is strong enough against background colors.
Avoid using too many font weights to keep the UI clean.
Test readability on smaller mobile screens.

Splash Screen

The Splash Screen is the first screen users see when opening your mobile app. It usually displays your brand identity while the app loads.

A well-designed splash screen creates a strong first impression and reinforces brand recognition.

What You Can Customize

You can upload a splash screen image that will be displayed when the app launches.

Recommended Design

For the best experience:

Use a high-resolution splash screen image
Use PNG or SVG format for better quality
Ensure transparent backgrounds when needed
Keep the design clean and centered
Avoid placing too many elements on the splash screen
Avoid small or pixelated images
Ensure the design matches your brand identity

How to Configure Splash Screen

Navigate to App Design
Open Branding
Select Splash Screen
Upload your brand logo
Save the configuration

$\"\"$

Preview Your Branding

After updating your branding settings:

Open Ego Live Preview
Review how your branding appears in the app
Check typography readability
Verify splash screen appearance
Confirm that brand elements look consistent across the app

This helps ensure your branding is displayed correctly and consistently before submitting your app.

","mob-art-customize-app-design","customize-app-design","How to Customize Your App Design","Go to App Design and choose the screen or section you want to customize.",[815],[],{"_158":543,"_193":816,"_195":647},"

Step 1: Open the Design Editor

Go to App Design and choose the screen or section you want to customize.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Update Design Settings

Modify the available settings such as:

Colors
Fonts
Images
Section order
Visibility
Spacing or content

$\"\"$

Step 3: Previewing Design Changes

When you update any settings in the configuration panel on the right (such as text, colors, buttons, or image attributes), the changes will be instantly reflected in the mobile preview on the left.

This allows you to see how your design appears on a real mobile layout in real time while adjusting the settings.

Tip: Use the mobile preview to quickly verify:

Text readability
Image appearance
Button placement
Overall layout and visual balance

$\"\"$

Step 4: Save Your Changes

Once your edits are complete, click Save to keep your updates.

$\"\"$

Step 5: Continue to App Preview or Submission

After finishing the design customization, you can move to:

Scan the QR code on Ego Live Preview to view the app interface directly on your mobile device. If you don’t have the app installed yet, please click here to download the app. (attach the download link)

$\"\"$

Submit App when your design is ready for publishing

$\"\"$

Recommended Design Workflow

For the best results, follow this order:

Set up the app branding
Customize the layout of the pages
Preview the full design in the app preview
Configure app notifications
Make final refinements before submission

This workflow helps keep your design process organized and reduces rework later.

Tips for a Better Mobile App Design

Keep the design clean
Use consistent brand colors throughout the app
Avoid overcrowding screens with too many sections
Make key actions stand out clearly
Test banners and text on mobile preview before publishing
Prioritize usability over decoration

A good app design should not only look attractive but also help customers browse and shop more easily.

Common Issues and How to Fix Them

Design changes do not appear in preview

Make sure you clicked Save
Refresh the preview
Check whether the section is currently hidden

Text is hard to read

Improve contrast between text and background colors
Reduce the use of overly light or bright colors
Use simpler typography settings

Images look cropped or blurry

Upload higher-quality images
Use recommended image dimensions
Avoid adding too much text inside banners

App feels visually inconsistent

Recheck your primary colors, fonts, and button styles
Use the same design rules across all screens
Remove unnecessary visual variations

Need Help?

If you continue to experience issues while customizing your design, please contact our support team.

Email: <help@egohub.com>

Our team will help you resolve the issue as quickly as possible.

","mob-art-overview","The App Design Customization section allows you to control the visual appearance of your mobile app and align it with your brand. In this area, you can…",[821],[],{"_158":543,"_193":822,"_195":647},"

The App Design Customization section allows you to control the visual appearance of your mobile app and align it with your brand. In this area, you can customize key design elements such as colors, typography, images, layout sections, and preview how your app will look before publishing.

This feature helps you:

Build a branded mobile app experience
Keep your app visually consistent with your store
Preview design changes before submission
Improve customer experience with a polished interface

Accessing App Design Customization

To start customizing your app design:

Open the app in Shopify Admin and go to App Design
Select the design or theme you want to edit
Start customizing the available sections

Depending on your app setup, you may see multiple design areas such as:

Home screen
Product listing pages
Product detail pages
Collection pages
Search
Cart
Navigation
Branding

What You Can Customize

1. Typography

Typography settings let you adjust how text appears in the app.

You may be able to customize:

Font family
Heading style
Body text style
Font size
Font weight

Use typography settings to ensure your app feels modern, readable, and aligned with your brand tone.

Best practice: Avoid using too many font styles. A clean and simple typography system creates a better mobile experience.

2. Images and Banners

Some sections allow you to upload or update visual assets such as:

Hero banners
Promotional images
Collection banners
Category thumbnails
Icon images

Make sure your images are:

High quality
Properly cropped
Optimized for mobile display
Consistent in branding and tone

Best practice: Use clear, high-resolution images with minimal text so they display well across different device sizes.

3. Layout and Section Arrangement

Across all supported Screens (Pages), you can configure the display settings of different Sections. You can typically:

Reorder sections
Hide or show sections
Edit section content
Configure spacing or display style

Best practice: Place the most important content near the top of the screen to improve visibility and engagement.

4. Buttons and Interactive Elements

You can customize the look of action elements such as:

Primary buttons
Secondary buttons
Call-to-action sections
Navigation tabs
Icons

This helps ensure actions like Shop Now, Add to Cart, and View Collection are visually clear and easy to use.

Best practice: Use one clear primary button style across the app to keep the experience consistent.

","mob-art-welcome","welcome","Welcome to Ego Mobile Builder","Ego Mobile Builder is an in-app tool within Shopify that allows merchants to quickly create and manage their own mobile shopping app without coding.",[829],[],{"_158":543,"_193":830,"_195":647},"

Ego Mobile Builder is an in-app tool within Shopify that allows merchants to quickly create and manage their own mobile shopping app without coding.

With Ego Mobile Builder, merchants can transform their Shopify store into a fully functional mobile app for iOS and Android, helping them deliver a faster, more engaging shopping experience for their customers.

The app builder provides an intuitive interface where merchants can:

Customize the mobile app layout and design
Sync products, collections, and store data directly from Shopify
Preview the app in real time
Configure essential mobile features such as push notifications, navigation, and branding
Submit the app to Apple App Store and Google Play

By leveraging Ego Mobile Builder, merchants can launch a mobile app faster, strengthen brand presence, and increase customer engagement through a dedicated mobile shopping experience.

","fbpx-art-upload-feed","upload-feed","Upload Feed","https://business.facebook.com/settings/catalogs",[840],[],"facebook-pixel","Ego Facebook Pixel","Feed",{"_158":543,"_193":841,"_195":647},"

Step 1: Copy the Feed URL generated in the app.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Go to Meta Commerce Manager >> Select Data Sources >> Select your Catalog.

https://business.facebook.com/settings/catalogs

$\"\"$

Step 3: Click “ Open in Commerce Manager” >> Click “Add” >> Select “ Data file”

$\"\"$

Step 4: Paste link URL into the Use a URL or Google Sheets field and hit Next

$\"\"$

","fbpx-art-create-feed","create-feed","Create Feed","After the feed is created, the system will generate a Feed URL that can be used to sync product data with Meta.",[848],[],{"_158":543,"_193":849,"_195":647},"

Step 1: Go to Feeds in the app dashboard and click “ Create Feed”

$\"\"$

Step 2: Configure the feed settings:

Feed Name – Enter a name for your feed.
Product Source – Select the products you want to include.
Variant Export – Choose how product variants should be exported.
Image Settings – Select which product images will be included.
Pricing Settings – Choose how product prices will be displayed.
Select the Feed Update Schedule (Daily or Weekly).

$\"\"$

Step 3: Click Create Feed to generate the feed.

After the feed is created, the system will generate a Feed URL that can be used to sync product data with Meta.

$\"\"$

","fbpx-art-what-is-a-feed","what-is-a-feed","What is a Feed?","The Feed generates a product data feed URL from your store. This feed contains up-to-date product information such as title, description, price,…",[856],[],{"_158":543,"_193":857,"_195":647},"

The Feed generates a product data feed URL from your store. This feed contains up-to-date product information such as title, description, price, availability, images, and variants.

The generated feed can be used to sync your products with external advertising and marketing platforms, allowing those platforms to automatically pull the latest product data from your store.

With this feed you can:

Provide a product feed URL that can be connected to advertising platforms.
Import products into Meta Commerce Manager / Meta Catalog.
Use the catalog for Dynamic Product Ads (DPA) on Facebook and Instagram.
Ensure product data (price, stock status, images) stays automatically updated on those platforms.

","fbpx-art-create-catalog","create-catalog","Create Catalog","Before creating a catalog, you need to connect your Meta (Facebook) account.",[865],[],"Catalog",{"_158":543,"_193":866,"_195":647},"

Step 1: Open Catalog Manager

In the app dashboard, go to Catalog Manager.
Click Create Catalog to start creating a new catalog.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Connect your Meta account

Before creating a catalog, you need to connect your Meta (Facebook) account.

$\"\"$

=> Once connected, you can create and manage catalogs directly from the app.

Step 3: Enter catalog information

Business Account – Select the connected Meta Business account

$\"\"$

Pixel – Select the Pixel you want to connect with this catalog

Best practice: We recommend connecting only one Meta Pixel to each catalog. Using a single pixel helps ensure accurate event tracking and improves product matching for Dynamic Ads.

According to Meta Platforms documentation, a pixel should be associated with the same catalog used for advertising so that events such as ViewContent, AddToCart, and Purchase can be correctly matched with catalog items.

https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1275400645914358

$\"\"$

Catalog Name – Name of your catalog

$\"\"$

Step 4: Configure Catalog Settings

After entering the catalog name, configure the catalog settings:

$\"\"$

=> Then click \"Save\" to save the catalog.

Step 5: Verify the catalog

You can check the catalog status in: Catalog Manager inside the app or Meta Commerce Manager.

https://business.facebook.com/commerce_manager

$\"\"$

Click \"Open in Commerce Manager\" to manage the Catalog.

$\"\"$

Make sure products are successfully synced and ready for advertising.

$\"\"$

","fbpx-art-what-is-a-catalog","what-is-a-catalog","What is a Catalog?","A Facebook Catalog stores information about the products you want to promote on Facebook (Meta) ads, such as name, price, description, image, and availability.",[873],[],{"_158":543,"_193":874,"_195":647},"

A Facebook Catalog stores information about the products you want to promote on Facebook (Meta) ads, such as name, price, description, image, and availability.

By connecting your store to a catalog, your product data can sync automatically and be used in Facebook ads and shopping features.

Key Benefits:

Product Management: Organize and update all product information in one place.
Dynamic Ads: Automatically show relevant products to customers who interacted with your store.
Shopping Features: Enable product discovery through Facebook and Instagram shopping experiences.
Auto Sync: Keep product details, prices, and inventory updated from your store.

","fbpx-art-performance-analytics","performance-analytics","Performance Analytics","Select a date range to view analytics within a specific period (e.g., Last 7 days).",[882,883,884,885],[],"Analytics",{"_158":895,"_193":896,"_195":897},{"_158":892,"_193":893,"_195":894},{"_158":889,"_193":890,"_195":891},{"_158":886,"_193":887,"_195":888},"products-analytics","

Displays the top performing products by revenue.

Metrics include:

View Content - Number of product page views for products with that tag.
Add to Cart - Number of times products with that tag were added to cart.
Initiate Checkout - Number of checkout events for products with that tag.
Purchase - Number of successful purchases.
Revenue: Total revenue generated by products.

$\"\"$

=> This section helps you identify best-selling products and high-interest items.

","Products Analytics","tags-analytics","

This section analyzes performance based on Shopify product tags.

Metrics explained:

View Content - Number of product page views for products with that tag.
Add to Cart - Number of times products with that tag were added to cart.
Initiate Checkout - Number of checkout events for products with that tag.
Purchase - Number of successful purchases.
Conv. Rate - Conversion rate from View Content → Purchase.
Revenue: Total revenue generated by products with that tag.

$\"\"$

The Revenue by Tag chart helps identify which product categories generate the most sales.

$\"\"$

","Tags Analytics","funnel-conversion-metrics","

These metrics show how customers move through the shopping journey.

View Content → Add to Cart: Number of customers who added a product to cart after viewing it.
Add to Cart → Purchase: Shows how many users completed a purchase after adding items to the cart.
View Content → Purchase: Shows the overall product page to purchase conversion rate.

$\"\"$

","Funnel Conversion Metrics","date-range","

Select a date range to view analytics within a specific period (e.g., Last 7 days).

$\"\"$

=> All data in this page will update based on the selected timeframe.

","Date Range","fbpx-art-pixel-analytics","pixel-analytics","Pixel Analytics","The Pixel Analytics page provides an overview of all events tracked by your connected Meta Pixel. It helps you monitor user interactions, evaluate…",[904],[],{"_158":543,"_193":905,"_195":647},"

The Pixel Analytics page provides an overview of all events tracked by your connected Meta Pixel. It helps you monitor user interactions, evaluate conversion performance, and analyze event trends within a selected time range.

This page displays key event metrics and visualizes event activity over time.

How to Use Pixel Analytics?

Step 1: Select a Pixel

At the top of the page, select the Pixel you want to analyze.

Click the Pixel dropdown
Choose the Pixel connected to your store

$\"\"$

The dashboard will update automatically with the selected Pixel's data.

Step 2: Choose a Date Range

Use the Date Range filter to view analytics within a specific period.

$\"\"$

All metrics and charts will refresh based on the selected time range.

The dashboard displays key event statistics tracked by your Pixel.

Each card shows:

Total event count
Comparison with the previous period

$\"\"$


PageView	Triggered when a user visits a page on your store
ViewContent	Triggered when a user views a product page
ViewCollection	Triggered when a user views a product collection
ViewCart	Triggered when a user views the shopping cart
AddToCart	Triggered when a user adds a product to the cart
Search	Triggered when a user performs a search
InitiateCheckout	Triggered when a user starts the checkout process
AddPaymentInfo	Triggered when a user enters payment information
Purchase	Triggered when an order is successfully completed
Revenue	Total revenue generated from purchase events

The Event Activities chart visualizes event activity over time:

Displays event trends across the selected date range
Each line represents a different event type
Helps identify traffic patterns and conversion behavior

$\"\"$

Action:

Use the All Events dropdown to filter specific event types.

$\"\"$

Click the icon ”<i class=\"fa-eye\">:eye:</i>\" to display event details

$\"\"$

","fbpx-art-meta-reporting-delays","meta-reporting-delays","About Meta Reporting Delays","Once your pixels are set up, events will start being sent to Meta, but they may take some time to appear in Meta dashboards and reports.",[913],[],"Launch Your Pixel",{"_158":543,"_193":914,"_195":647},"

Once your pixels are set up, events will start being sent to Meta, but they may take some time to appear in Meta dashboards and reports.

Stats may take time to appear After events are sent to Meta, it can take at least 30 minutes for statistics to show up in the dashboard. This is normal Meta behavior — not an issue with your integration.

Why does this happen?

Meta doesn't display events the moment they're received. Instead, they process incoming data in batches before surfacing it in the Overview tab. This is standard behavior across all Meta integrations — the delay is fixed at the platform level and typically ranges from 30 minutes to a few hours.

The screenshot below shows what you might see right after setup — the Overview tab shows no activity even though events are already being received by Meta.

$\"\"$

How to confirm your events are working right now?

Don't wait for the Overview to update. Use the Test Events tab in Meta Events Manager instead — it shows events in real time as they arrive, with no delay.

Check Event Delivery

","fbpx-art-check-event-delivery","check-event-delivery","Check Event Delivery","After completing the setup, you should test your events to make sure they are being sent and received correctly. This ensures your pixel tracking is working…",[921,922,923,924],[],{"_158":543,"_193":934,"_195":647},{"_158":931,"_193":932,"_195":933},{"_158":928,"_193":929,"_195":930},{"_158":925,"_193":926,"_195":927},"check-events-in-meta-events-manager-overview","

After verifying that events are being sent successfully through Live Diagnostics and Meta Test Events, you can use the Overview tab in Meta Events Manager to confirm that your events are being received and processed correctly by Meta.

Open Meta Events Manager

Log in to your Meta Business account.
Navigate to Events Manager.
Select the Pixel connected to your store.
Open the Overview tab.

Verify Received Events

In the Overview tab, Meta displays all events received by your Pixel.

These events may take some time to appear after being triggered.

$\"\"$

Custom Event Warning

⚠️ ViewCart and ViewCollection may appear as Custom Events in Meta Events Manager because they are not included in Meta's Standard Event list. This is expected behavior and does not affect tracking accuracy or event delivery.

Confirm Custom Events

In some cases, Meta may display a warning asking you to review or confirm these events.

To confirm a custom event:

Locate the event in the Overview or Diagnostics section.
Click Review or Confirm Event.
Follow Meta's instructions to mark the event as expected.

Note: Confirming an event only removes the warning displayed by Meta. The event is already being tracked correctly before and after confirmation.

","Check Events in Meta Events Manager Overview","test-events-in-meta-events-manager","

You can also verify event delivery directly in Meta Events Manager. To test server-side events (Conversions API), you need to use a Test Event Code.

Step 1: Get the Test Event Code

Log in to your Meta Business account and open Events Manager. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager2
Select the Pixel (Dataset) connected to your store.
Open the Test Events tab.
Copy the Test Event Code displayed on the page.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Add the Test Event Code in the Pixel

Go to app and select Pixel
Paste the Test Event Code into the Test Event Code field.
Save the settings.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Generate Test Events

Perform actions on your store such as:

View product
Add to cart
Initiate checkout
Purchase

Step 4: Verify Events

Return to Meta Events Manager → Test Events and check whether the events appear in the dashboard.

$\"\"$

=> If the events are displayed here, it confirms that Meta is successfully receiving your browser and server events (Pixel + CAPI).

Important: After testing, remove the Test Event Code from the app. Otherwise, Meta will treat incoming events as test events and they will not be recorded in your main event reporting.

","Test Events in Meta Events Manager","test-events-in-the-app-live-diagnostic","

Important: To use Live Diagnostic, your Pixel must have Conversions API (CAPI) enabled.

The Live Diagnostic feature in the app allows you to monitor events in real time when users interact with your store.

Step 1:

Open the Live Diagnostic section in the app dashboard.
Select the pixel you want to test.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Click \"Open store\" to visit your storefront and perform actions such as:

View a product
Add a product to cart
Start checkout
Complete a purchase

$\"\"$

Step 3:Return to the Live Diagnostic screen to see the events captured in real time.

$\"\"$

⇒ If the events appear in the list, it means the tracking is working correctly.

","Test Events in the App (Live Diagnostic)","

After completing the setup, you should test your events to make sure they are being sent and received correctly. This ensures your pixel tracking is working properly and that Meta can accurately record conversions.

","fbpx-art-disable-other-pixels","disable-other-pixels","Disable Other Pixels","If multiple pixels or integrations send events at the same time, it can cause:",[941,942,943],[],{"_158":543,"_193":950,"_195":647},{"_158":947,"_193":948,"_195":949},{"_158":944,"_193":945,"_195":946},"disable-meta-pixel-from-other-shopify-apps","

To avoid duplicate tracking events, make sure to disable or uninstall other apps that also track Meta/Facebook Pixel or Conversion API.

If these apps remain active, they may send duplicate events to Meta, which can affect your tracking accuracy.

If you need assistance identifying or disabling other tracking apps, please contact our support team for help.

$\"\"$

","Disable Meta Pixel from Other Shopify Apps","disable-shopify-s-default-meta-pixel","

Shopify provides a built-in Facebook & Instagram sales channel that may automatically send events to Meta. If this is enabled, it can duplicate the events sent by our app.

Step 1: Go to Shopify Admin and Click Facebook & Instagram in the left menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Open the Settings tab.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Find the Share Data / Pixel tracking section.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Click Change.

$\"\"$

Step 5: Set the tracking option to Disabled or remove the connected pixel.

$\"\"$

=> This ensures Shopify will stop sending events through its built-in integration.

","Disable Shopify’s Default Meta Pixel","

If multiple pixels or integrations send events at the same time, it can cause:

Duplicate events in Meta Events Manager
Incorrect conversion tracking
Unreliable analytics and campaign optimization

","fbpx-art-get-test-event-code","get-test-event-code","Get a Test Event Code for Conversions API","Follow the steps below to get a Test Event Code.",[957],[],{"_158":543,"_193":958,"_195":647},"

Follow the steps below to get a Test Event Code.

Step 1: Open Meta Events Manager

Log in to your Meta Business account, then go to Events Manager. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager2
Select the Pixel (Dataset) that you want to test.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Open the Test Events Tab

In the Pixel dashboard, click the Test events tab.

$\"\"$

=> This section allows you to test events coming from your browser or server.

Step 3: Copy the Test Event Code

Scroll down to the Confirm your server’s events are set up correctly
Click Copy next to the Test Event Code.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Paste the Code into the App

Go back to your app dashboard and paste the Test Event Code into the Test Event Code field.

$\"\"$

=> Once the code is added, all events sent from the server will appear in the Test Events section in Meta Events Manager, allowing you to verify that your Conversions API integration is working correctly.

Important: After completing the test, make sure to remove the Test Event Code from the app. If the code remains active, Meta will treat all incoming events as test events, and they will not be recorded in your production event data.

","fbpx-art-get-access-token","get-access-token","Get an Access Token for Conversions API",[964],[],{"_158":543,"_193":965,"_195":647},"

Step 1: Open Event Manager in your Meta Business account

Go to Meta Business Manager and Navigate to Event Manager. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager2
Select Datasets in the left menu.
Choose the dataset (Pixel) you want to use.
Open the Settings tab.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Generate the access token

Scroll down to the Set up direct integration section.
Click Generate access token.

$\"\"$

Copy the generated Access Token.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Add the token to the app

Return to your app’s CAPI configuration page.
Paste the Access Token into the Access Token field.
Click Save to complete the setup.

$\"\"$

","fbpx-art-set-up-capi-token","set-up-capi-token","Set Up Conversions API (CAPI) Token",[971],[],{"_158":543,"_193":972,"_195":647},"

Get an Access Token for Conversions API: The Access Token allows the app to send server-side events to Meta using the Conversions API (CAPI). These events will be stored in your Pixel dataset and processed by Meta similarly to browser events
Get an Test Event Code for Conversions API: A Test Event Code allows you to verify that events sent from your server through the Conversions API (CAPI) are received correctly by Meta before they are sent to live production data.

","fbpx-art-add-your-pixel","add-your-pixel","Add Your Pixel","=> You will see the Create New Pixel configuration screen.",[979,980],[],{"_158":984,"_193":985,"_195":986},{"_158":981,"_193":982,"_195":983},"method-2-auto-connect-pixel-recommended","

Step 1: Open the Pixel Manager screen

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to Facebook Pixel.
Click Create New Pixel.

$\"\"$

➡ You will see the Pixel setup screen.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Choose Auto Connect Pixel

At the top of the setup screen:

Select Auto Connect Pixel (recommended option)

This method allows you to connect your Meta Pixel without manual input.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Log in to Meta account

Click Connect Facebook.

$\"\"$

A Meta login popup will appear.
Log in to your Meta (Facebook) account.

➡ Make sure you use an account with access to your Business Manager.

Step 4: Grant permissions

Click Continue
Approve all required permissions

➡ This allows Ego to:

Access your Pixel
Send events via Conversions API
Sync tracking data

$\"\"$

Step 5: Select your Pixel

After logging in:

Choose your Business Account
Select your Ad Account
Select your Meta Pixel (Dataset)

➡ Only Pixels you have permission for will be displayed.

$\"\"$

Step 6: Choose Tracking Scope

In the Tracking Scope section, choose where the pixel will track events.

Entire store: Track events across your entire store.

Specific target: Track events only for selected items. If you choose this option, you can configure:

Specific Products – select products to track
Collection page – select specific collections
Specific tags – track products with selected tags

$\"\"$

Step 7: Enable Conversion API (Optional)

In the Conversion API section: Turn on Conversions API (solution for iOS 14.5)

$\"\"$

=> This enables server-side tracking, which improves event accuracy and helps avoid browser restrictions or ad blockers.

Set up Conversions API (CAPI) token in your Ego Pixel

Step 8: Configure Event Settings

In the Event settings section, select the events you want to send to Meta.

Available events include:

PageView
ViewContent
AddToCart
ViewCart
InitiateCheckout
AddPaymentInfo
Purchase
Search
ViewCollection

=> Only enabled events will be sent to Meta.

Step 9: Select Customer Information Parameters

In Customer information parameters, choose the customer data to include with events for better matching in Meta.

Available parameters include:

First Name
Last Name
Email
Phone
City
State
Zip Code
Country
External ID

=> Providing more parameters can improve event matching quality.

Step 10: Save the Pixel

After finishing the configuration, Click Save in the top-right corner.

⇒ The pixel will start tracking events based on your settings.

","Method 2: Auto Connect Pixel (Recommended)","method-1-manual-input-pixel","

Step 1: Open the Create Pixel screen

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to Facebook Pixel.
Click Create New Pixel.

$\"\"$

=> You will see the Create New Pixel configuration screen.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Choose Manual Setup

At the top of the setup screen ⇒ Select Manual Setup

$\"\"$

Step 3: Enter Pixel Information

At the top of the page, enter the required pixel details.

Pixel name: Enter a name to identify this pixel in your store.
Pixel ID: Paste your Facebook Pixel ID from Meta Events Manager.

$\"\"$

How to get your Pixel ID?

Go to Meta Events Manager https://business.facebook.com/events_manager
Select the Pixel you want to use.
In the Overview tab, find the Pixel ID displayed at the top of the page.
Copy the Pixel ID.
Return to the app and paste the Pixel ID into the “Pixel ID” field.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Choose Tracking Scope

In the Tracking Scope section, choose where the pixel will track events.

Entire store: Track events across your entire store.

Specific target: Track events only for selected items. If you choose this option, you can configure:

Specific Products – select products to track
Collection page – select specific collections
Specific tags – track products with selected tags

$\"\"$

Step 5: Enable Conversion API (Optional)

In the Conversion API section: Turn on Conversions API (solution for iOS 14.5)

$\"\"$

=> This enables server-side tracking, which improves event accuracy and helps avoid browser restrictions or ad blockers.

Set up Conversions API (CAPI) token in your Ego Pixel

Step 6: Configure Event Settings

In the Event settings section, select the events you want to send to Meta.

Available events include:

PageView
ViewContent
AddToCart
ViewCart
InitiateCheckout
AddPaymentInfo
Purchase
Search
ViewCollection

=> Only enabled events will be sent to Meta.

Step 7: Select Customer Information Parameters

In Customer information parameters, choose the customer data to include with events for better matching in Meta.

Available parameters include:

First Name
Last Name
Email
Phone
City
State
Zip Code
Country
External ID

=> Providing more parameters can improve event matching quality.

Step 8: Save the Pixel

After finishing the configuration, Click Save in the top-right corner.

⇒ The pixel will start tracking events based on your settings.

","Method 1: Manual Input Pixel","fbpx-art-enable-theme-extension","enable-theme-extension","Enable Ego Pixel Theme Extension","Two ways to enable the App Embed in your theme",[993,994,995],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1002,"_195":647},{"_158":999,"_193":1000,"_195":1001},{"_158":996,"_193":997,"_195":998},"method-2-enable-from-the-shopify-dashboard","

Step 1: Open Online Store

From the left sidebar in Shopify Admin, navigate to: Online Store → Themes

$\"\"$

Step 2: Edit the Current Theme

In the Current theme section, click Edit theme.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Open App EmbedsInside the Theme Editor:

Click the App embeds icon in the left sidebar.
Locate the embed related to your app.
Turn the toggle ON to enable it.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Save Changes

Click Save in the top-right corner to apply the changes.

$\"\"$

=> The app embed is activated and the app’s functionality will run on the storefront.

","Method 2: Enable from the Shopify Dashboard","method-1-enable-from-the-in-app-guide","

Step 1: Open the Theme Editor

From the app Dashboard, click Enable app embed in the notification banner. => You will be redirected to the Shopify Theme Editor.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Enable the App Embed

In the Theme Editor:

Click App embeds in the left sidebar.
Locate Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed
Toggle the switch ON to enable it.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Save the Settings

Click Save in the top-right corner to apply the changes.

$\"\"$

","Method 1: Enable from the in-app guide","

Two ways to enable the App Embed in your theme

You can enable the app embed extension using one of the following methods:

","fbpx-art-link-meta-pixel","link-meta-pixel","Link Meta Pixel to Ego Pixel",[1008],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1009,"_195":647},"

Enable Ego Pixel theme extension: To allow the app to track events on your store, you must enable the app embed feature in your Shopify theme.
Add your pixel
Set up Conversions API (CAPI) token in your Ego Pixel
Get an Access Token for Conversions API: The Access Token allows the app to send server-side events to Meta using the Conversions API (CAPI). These events will be stored in your Pixel dataset and processed by Meta similarly to browser events
Get an Test Event Code for Conversions API: A Test Event Code allows you to verify that events sent from your server through the Conversions API (CAPI) are received correctly by Meta before they are sent to live production data.
Disable other Pixels: To ensure accurate event tracking, we recommend disabling other Meta Pixel integrations before using this app.
Check Event Delivery
About Meta Reporting Delays

","fbpx-art-prepare-pixel","prepare-pixel","Prepare Pixel","⇒ This is where you create and manage your tracking assets, including Pixel (Dataset).",[1016],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1017,"_195":647},"

Step 1: Access Events Manager

Log in to your Meta Business Manager account.
Open Events Manager from the main menu. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager
Click Connect Data.

$\"\"$

⇒ This is where you create and manage your tracking assets, including Pixel (Dataset).

Step 2: Choose Web as Your Data Source

Select Web as the data source type.
Click Next.

$\"\"$

⇒ This tells Meta that you want to track website activity using a Pixel.

Step 3: Configure Your Pixel

Enter a Pixel Name (we recommend using your store or brand name).
(Optional) Enter your website URL.
Click Create.

$\"\"$

⇒ Meta will now generate your new Pixel automatically.

Step 4: Confirm Pixel Creation

After setup:

Your new Pixel will appear inside Events Manager
It will be assigned a unique Pixel ID

$\"\"$

","fbpx-art-meta-pixel-and-capi","meta-pixel-and-capi","Meta (Facebook) Pixel & CAPI","A small piece of code added to your website that helps you understand what visitors do (for example: view a product, add to cart, purchase).",[1024,1025,1026,1027],[],{"_158":1037,"_193":1038,"_195":1039},{"_158":1034,"_193":1035,"_195":1036},{"_158":1031,"_193":1032,"_195":1033},{"_158":1028,"_193":1029,"_195":1030},"conclusion","

Meta Pixel is the simplest way to start tracking and improving Meta ads.
CAPI makes tracking more reliable, especially when browsers block data.

⇒ For the best results, a Pixel + CAPI setup usually gives the most accurate reporting and stronger ad optimization.

","Conclusion","comparison","

Topic	Meta Pixel	CAPI
Where it runs	In the visitor’s browser	On your server
Reliability	Medium (can be blocked)	Higher (less affected by blocking)
Setup difficulty	Easier	Usually harder (but apps can make it easy)
Best for	Quick tracking + basic ads optimization	More complete conversion tracking + better data quality
Common risk	Missing events	Double-counting if not matched correctly

Best practice for most stores: use both together, set up properly so Meta can match the same event and count it once.

","Comparison","capi-server-tracking","

What it is?

A way to send the same website actions to Meta from your server (not only from the visitor’s browser).

What it can do for your site?

Make your ad reporting more complete
Improve ad optimization by sending more reliable purchase signals
Recover tracking signals that the browser may block

Pros:

More stable when browsers block tracking
Often captures more purchases and checkout events
Helps reduce “missing conversions” in reports

Cons:

Setup is usually more complex than Pixel (your app can simplify this)
Needs careful configuration to avoid “double counting” (Pixel + CAPI must be matched correctly)

","CAPI (Server tracking)","meta-pixel-browser-tracking","

What it is?

A small piece of code added to your website that helps you understand what visitors do (for example: view a product, add to cart, purchase).

What it can do for your site?

Track key actions: Page View, View Content, Add to Cart, Checkout, Purchase
Help Meta (Facebook/Instagram) ads learn who is likely to buy
Improve ad reporting (which ads lead to sales)

Pros:

Easy and fast to set up
Great for basic tracking and ad optimization
Works well for most stores without extra systems

Cons:

Can miss some data when browsers block tracking (ad blockers, privacy settings, iOS limits)
Depends on the visitor’s device and browser conditions

","Meta Pixel (Browser tracking)","fbpx-art-welcome","Welcome to Ego Facebook Pixel","Accurate tracking is essential to understand your customers and maximize the performance of your advertising campaigns.",[1045],[],{"_158":1046,"_193":1047,"_195":1048},"why-ego-facebook-pixel-meta-feed","

Accurate tracking is essential to understand your customers and maximize the performance of your advertising campaigns.

Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed helps you track and optimize your store performance across Meta platforms with reliable event tracking and seamless catalog integration. By combining Facebook Pixel and Conversion API, the app ensures accurate event tracking even with iOS 14+ restrictions and ad blockers.

Gain better insights into customer behavior, improve attribution accuracy, and power your Meta ads with high-quality data. With a simple setup and no coding required, you can start tracking and optimizing your campaigns in just minutes.

Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed – Key Capabilities

Track unlimited Meta Pixels to monitor customer interactions across your store

Server-side tracking with Conversion API to improve event accuracy and bypass browser limitations

Real-time event monitoring to verify that your tracking setup is working correctly

Seamless Meta Catalog integration to keep your product feed synchronized automatically

Improve ad performance with reliable product data for Dynamic Ads and retargeting

Detailed analytics and event insights to support smarter marketing decisions

Privacy-friendly tracking designed to support modern data compliance standards

","Why Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed?","c2f9e5a2ed05b4294bc193b4f","Pricing, theme compatibility, variants, multiple bars, and performance.",[1057,1058,1059,1060,1061,1062],[1055,1056],"sticky-atc","Ego Sticky Add to Cart","bar-not-showing","display-behavior-and-click-actions",{"_158":1078,"_193":1079,"_195":1080},{"_158":1075,"_193":1076,"_195":1077},{"_158":1072,"_193":1073,"_195":1074},{"_158":1069,"_193":1070,"_195":1071},{"_158":1066,"_193":1067,"_195":1068},{"_158":1063,"_193":1064,"_195":1065},"faq-speed","

No measurable impact — the bar is a single lightweight script loaded through Shopify's app-embed system, and it only runs on pages where the bar can appear.

","Will it slow down my store?","faq-mobile","

Yes — visibility, trigger, position, sizing, and click action are all configured per device, and mobile has its own compact Minimal style. A common setup: desktop shows the full bar on scroll-past-button; mobile shows the Minimal bar always.

","Can the bar behave differently on mobile?","faq-multiple-bars","

Yes — create as many as you like and keep unused ones as Drafts. Use display rules to point different bars at different products or collections, and compare their clicks and revenue in the bar list. See Managing Your Bars for the A/B workflow.

","Can I create multiple bars?","faq-variants","

Enable the variant selector element and shoppers pick size/color directly in the bar. With the selector hidden, the bar adds whatever variant is currently selected on the page. If the chosen variant is out of stock, the button switches to your out-of-stock state (own text and colors); whether the bar appears at all on sold-out variants is a separate toggle.

","How does the bar handle products with variants?","faq-theme","

The bar is a standard theme app embed and works with Online Store 2.0 themes without code changes. It inherits your theme font by default, and cart-drawer behavior follows your theme. If anything looks off on your specific theme, our team adjusts it for free — just open the chat.

","Does it work with my theme?","faq-free","

Yes — Ego Sticky Add to Cart is completely free to install, including setup help, widget customization, and migration support from our team via the in-app chat.

","Is the app free?","cbf6173a16c08959a7ad3817e","Bar Not Showing on Storefront","Symptom-based checklist — from the most common cause down.",[1088,1089,1090,1091,1092],[1086,1087],"installing-sticky-add-to-cart","product-display-rules",{"_158":1103,"_193":1104,"_195":1105},{"_158":1100,"_193":1101,"_195":1102},{"_158":1097,"_193":1098,"_195":1099},{"_158":1094,"_193":1095,"_195":1096},{"_158":230,"_193":1093,"_195":232},"

Test in an incognito window to rule out caching, and try a second browser. If the bar still doesn't appear, contact us via Chat with us (24/7) with your store URL and a product link — our team will check your theme and adjust the widget to fit it, free of charge.

","check-looks","

Common fixes:

Bar covered by a cookie banner or chat bubble → raise the Offset (up to 100 px desktop / 80 px mobile) to lift the bar clear.
Colors or fonts clash → set Font to Use current theme font and copy hex colors from your theme settings.
Bar feels cramped on mobile → switch the mobile style to Minimal.

","Bar shows but looks off → overlaps or styling clashes","check-rules-device","

Open the bar and verify:

Display rules — the product you're viewing isn't excluded, or is included in the \"specific\" selection. A product recently removed from an included collection silently drops out.
Device toggles — \"Show on desktop devices\" / \"Show on mobile devices\" are on for the device you're testing.
Trigger — with a scroll-based \"When to show\", the bar only appears after you start scrolling or pass the theme's Add to cart button. Scroll before concluding it's missing.

","Shows on some products/devices but not others → check rules and device settings","check-bar-status","

In Bar Editor, confirm your bar's status is Active. Draft bars are fully saved but never render. Also confirm you actually saved after the last edit — unsaved changes show in the save bar.

","Embed is active but still nothing → check the bar status","check-embed","

The Dashboard's status banner must read Active. If it's Inactive:

Click Active app embed — the Theme Editor opens.
Toggle the Sticky Cart embed on.
Click Save.

This is by far the most common cause — and it must be re-enabled whenever you publish a new theme, since the embed setting is per-theme.

","Bar shows nowhere → check the app embed","c438da54b785ba04342fe6190","Understanding Your Analytics","The four metrics, per-bar comparison, and how attribution works.",[1114,1115,1116],[1112,1113],"Managing & Analytics","managing-your-bars","create-your-first-bar",{"_158":1123,"_193":1124,"_195":1125},{"_158":1120,"_193":1121,"_195":1122},{"_158":1117,"_193":1118,"_195":1119},"how-attribution-works","

When a shopper adds a product through the sticky bar, the item is tagged with the bar that produced it. Orders containing tagged items then count toward that bar's Add to Cart and Revenue. Timing: impressions and clicks appear near-instantly; order-based figures appear shortly after the order is placed.

Revenue here is an estimate for comparing bars against each other — it doesn't account for refunds or cancellations. Always use Shopify's own reports for accounting.

","How revenue attribution works","per-bar-metrics","

The bar list shows Clicks and Revenue for each bar individually — the basis for the duplicate-and-compare workflow described in Managing Your Bars.

","Per-bar performance","dashboard-metrics","

The Dashboard shows four store-wide totals:

Metric	Meaning
Impression	How many times the sticky bar was shown to shoppers.
Clicks	Total clicks on the Sticky Add to Cart button.
Add to Cart	Successful add-to-cart actions made via the bar.
Revenue	Estimated revenue from orders that include items added via the bar.

Reading the funnel: impressions → clicks → add-to-carts. Lots of impressions but few clicks? The bar may be visually lost — try a stronger button color or the \"scrolls past the Add to cart button\" trigger so it appears at the decisive moment.

","Dashboard metrics","cb971a6329bc6bc432e9300d4","Managing Your Bars","The bar list, statuses, and a clean A/B-testing workflow with duplicates.",[1131,1132],[1113,183],{"_158":1136,"_193":1137,"_195":1138},{"_158":1133,"_193":1134,"_195":1135},"bar-actions","

Per bar: Edit, Duplicate, Delete (permanent — the app asks: \"Are you sure you want to delete this bar? This action cannot be undone.\"), and an inline status switch between Active and Draft.

A clean A/B workflow:

Duplicate your live bar.
Change exactly one thing on the copy (button color, trigger, click action).
Point the two bars at different collections via display rules — or run them in alternating weeks.
Compare Clicks and Revenue in the list and keep the winner.

Drafts are fully saved but never shown to shoppers — park experiments and seasonal variants there.

","Bar actions","bar-list","

The Bar Editor page lists all your bars with name, status, what they apply to, clicks, revenue, and activation date. Finding things:

Filter with the All / Active / Draft tabs.
Search by name.
Sort by name, status, or activation date.

","The bar list","c39860bb47c9f4d5d4e680d44","Product & Page Display Rules","Include, exclude, or feature one product on the homepage — with validation notes.",[1145,1146],[1056,1112],"Customization",{"_158":1150,"_193":1151,"_195":1152},{"_158":1147,"_193":1148,"_195":1149},"homepage","

Enable Show on homepage to display the bar on your home page too:

Toggle the option on.
Use the product picker (search or Browse) to choose the one product the homepage bar sells — your bestseller or the current promotion.

Visitors can then add that product to the cart straight from the homepage, without opening a product page. Rotate the featured product when your promotion changes.

","Featuring a product on the homepage","product-rules","

In Advanced display rules, pick one targeting mode:

Mode	Behavior	Example use
All Products (default)	Bar shows on every product page.	Most stores.
Specific product	Only on products you pick (multi-select).	Only your bestsellers get the bar.
Specific collections	Only on products in selected collections.	Only the \"Sale\" collection.
Exclude specific product	Everywhere except the picked products.	Hide on pre-order items.
Exclude specific collections	Everywhere except selected collections.	Hide on gift cards / services.

When a \"specific\" mode is selected, at least one product or collection must be chosen — the editor blocks saving with a warning (\"Action required: Changes needed to save bar\") until you do. Reset filters clears everything back to All Products.

","Product and collection rules","cb3fe33a0644fd5bcaab08bdb","design-and-text","Design & Text Content","Fonts, every color control, and the three customizable texts with their limits.",[1160,1161,1162],[1159,1113],"bar-layouts-and-elements",{"_158":1169,"_193":1170,"_195":1171},{"_158":1166,"_193":1167,"_195":1168},{"_158":1163,"_193":1164,"_195":1165},"text-content","

Three customizable texts, each with a length limit:

Text	Default	Limit
Add to Cart button	\"ADD TO CART\"	20 characters
Out of stock button	\"Out of stock\"	20 characters
Success message	\"Successfully added to cart!\"	50 characters

Selling in another language? Write the texts in your storefront's language — they render exactly as entered. Keep button text short and imperative; \"ADD TO CART\" outperforms clever copy.

","Text content","colors","

Every part of the bar has explicit color controls:

Button — text and background in three states: default, hover, and out of stock. Use your theme's primary CTA color for default; make out-of-stock visibly muted (e.g. gray background).
Card — bar background, product title, price, compare-at price, and saving-amount colors. The saving amount defaults to green — keep a color that reads as \"good news\".
Variant & quantity selectors — text, background, and border colors.

Copy exact hex values from your theme settings (Theme Editor → Theme settings → Colors) for a perfect match.

","Colors","fonts-and-borders","

Font defaults to Use current theme font, so the bar blends in with zero effort — recommended. Or pick a specific font: Helvetica, Arial, Tahoma, Trebuchet MS, Times New Roman, Georgia, Garamond, or Courier New.

For shape, switch between square and pill corners and fine-tune the border radius from 0 to 40 px — match the radius your theme uses on its own buttons for a native look.

","Fonts and borders","ccdd348d831f6f40e10d6b12f","Display Behavior & Click Actions","When the bar appears, where it sits, exact sizing ranges, and what the button does.",[1177,1178,1179,1180],[1159,1087],{"_158":1190,"_193":1191,"_195":1192},{"_158":1187,"_193":1188,"_195":1189},{"_158":1184,"_193":1185,"_195":1186},{"_158":1181,"_193":1182,"_195":1183},"click-actions","

Pick the Action on click per device:

Action	Behavior	Choose when…
Add on cart only (default)	Adds the item, shows the success toast, shopper stays on the page.	You want shoppers to keep browsing (higher multi-item carts).
Redirect to cart page	Adds the item and opens the cart.	You want a deliberate review-cart step.
Redirect to checkout (Buy now)	Adds the item and jumps straight to checkout.	Single-product stores, impulse purchases, ad landing pages.

On themes with a cart drawer, adding to cart also refreshes/opens the drawer where the theme supports it — the experience follows your theme automatically.

","What the button does","sizing","

Bar height (desktop): Small 60 px · Medium 80 px (default) · Large 100 px.
Bar content width: 70–100% of the bar.
Button height: 20–36 px (fixed in the Fill layout, where the button fills the bar).
Offset — distance from the screen edge: 0–100 px on desktop, 0–80 px on mobile. Use it to clear cookie banners or chat bubbles that sit in the same corner.

","Sizing reference","position-and-devices","

Place the bar at the Bottom (default) or Top of the screen — configured separately for desktop and mobile. Bottom is standard on mobile (thumb-reachable); top can work on desktop if your theme has a sticky header you want to pair with.

Independent toggles control whether the bar shows on desktop devices and mobile devices at all — e.g. run mobile-only if your desktop page is short.

","Position and devices","when-to-show","

Choose the trigger per device:

Trigger	Behavior	Choose when…
Always on display (default)	Visible from page load.	Maximum availability; short product pages.
When user starts scrolling	Appears on the first scroll.	You want a clean first impression, then persistent availability.
When user scrolls past the Add to cart button	Appears exactly when the theme's own button leaves the screen.	The elegant choice — there's never a moment without a buy button, and never two at once.

The bar slides in with a smooth animation in every mode.

","When the bar appears","cbe32c2de82d774142ca7738c","Bar Layouts & Elements","The four templates, every toggleable element, and the mobile Complete/Minimal styles.",[1198,1199,1200],[1154,1056],{"_158":1207,"_193":1208,"_195":1209},{"_158":1204,"_193":1205,"_195":1206},{"_158":1201,"_193":1202,"_195":1203},"mobile-style","

Mobile has its own style switch:

Complete — the full form with selectors, like desktop.
Minimal — a compact bar with just the essentials and the button.

Recommendation: start with Minimal on mobile. Vertical space is precious, and a compact bar converts without covering content. Switch to Complete only if variant selection in the bar is critical for your products.

","Mobile style: Complete vs. Minimal","bar-elements","

Per device, each element has its own toggle:

Product image and title — reminds the shopper what they're buying; hide on very small screens if space is tight.
Price, compare-at price, and the saving amount — showing the crossed-out price plus \"save $X\" is a proven nudge on discounted products.
Variant selector — lets shoppers pick size/color directly in the bar. Essential if your products have variants; without it the bar adds the currently selected variant.
Quantity selector — for products bought in multiples.
The Add to Cart button — always shown.

After a successful add, shoppers see a confirmation toast (\"Successfully added to cart!\" — text customizable).

","Elements you can show or hide","four-layouts","

Layout	Look	Choose when…
Classic	Clean full-width bar.	You want a safe default that fits any theme.
Floating	Detached, rounded, hovers above the edge.	Your theme has a modern, airy look.
Fill	Edge-to-edge with a full-height button.	You want the button to dominate.
Slash	Bold styling with accent-colored pricing.	You want the price/discount to pop.

Switching templates later keeps your bar; only the visual preset changes.

","The four layouts","ce58de5142a5f564d439759b1","Create Your First Sticky Bar","Template to live bar in five minutes — a guided walkthrough.",[1215,1216,1217],[1159,1056],{"_158":1224,"_193":1225,"_195":1226},{"_158":1221,"_193":1222,"_195":1223},{"_158":1218,"_193":1219,"_195":1220},"name-and-activate","

Give the bar a Template Name (required — e.g. \"Main product bar\").
Set Status to Active (or keep Draft to save without publishing).
Save, then open any product page on your storefront.

You should see the bar (respecting the trigger you chose), and clicking its button should add the product and show the success message. If not, walk through Bar Not Showing on Storefront.

","Step 3 — Name, activate, test","the-bar-editor","

The editor opens full-screen with a live preview you can flip between Desktop and Mobile. Settings sit in four accordion sections:

Device Settings — visibility, when the bar appears, click action, position, and sizing — separate sub-tabs for desktop and mobile.
Design — fonts, borders, and every color.
Text Content — the three customizable texts (button, out-of-stock, success message).
Advanced display rules — which products and pages show the bar.

For a first bar, the defaults are sensible — you can go live without touching most of them.

","Step 2 — Tour the editor","pick-a-template","

Open Bar Editor and click Create New Bar. Four templates appear with visual previews:

Classic — a clean full-width bar; the default and the safest fit for most themes.
Floating — a detached, rounded bar hovering above the page edge.
Fill — edge-to-edge with a full-height button.
Slash — a bold variant with accent-colored pricing.

The template sets the starting shape; every detail stays editable. When unsure, start with Classic.

","Step 1 — Pick a template","c5bbbe1698331e2c894e2eebf","Installing & Activating the App","Install, follow the two-step Quick Guide, and verify the bar is live.",[1232,1233,1234,1235],[1113,1055],{"_158":1242,"_193":1243,"_195":1244},{"_158":613,"_193":1240,"_195":1241},{"_158":1237,"_193":1238,"_195":1239},{"_158":604,"_193":1236,"_195":606},"

☑ App embed banner shows Active.
☑ At least one bar has status Active in the Bar Editor.
☑ Open a product page on your storefront — the bar appears (scroll if you chose a scroll-based trigger).
☑ Clicking the bar's button adds the product to the cart and shows the success message.

Need help at any point? The Chat with us button reaches our team 24/7, and setup help is free.

","app-embed-status","

The Dashboard shows an app-embed status banner:

Inactive — \"App embed is turned off and the Sticky add to cart bar will not be displayed on your storefront.\" Click Active app embed to open the Theme Editor and switch it on.
Active — \"Bar features are active and visible on your store.\" You're done.

The embed is per-theme: if you publish a new theme later, enable it again there. This single toggle is the cause of most \"bar disappeared\" reports.

","Step 2 — Verify the app embed","

Install the app from the Shopify App Store. The Dashboard greets you with a two-step Quick Guide:

\"Edit Sticky add to cart to match your needs\" — click Configure. This opens the bar creator where you pick a template and adjust functionality, display conditions, and design (see Create Your First Sticky Bar). The step completes once you've saved a bar.
\"Integrate Sticky Add to cart with your theme\" — click Integrate Now. Shopify's Theme Editor opens with the Sticky Cart app embed pre-selected: toggle it on and click Save. The step completes once the embed is detected.

","Step 1 — Install and configure","what-is-sticky-atc","

Ego Sticky Add to Cart keeps a buy bar always within reach while shoppers browse a product page. The bar can show the product image and title, price (with compare-at and savings), a variant selector, a quantity selector, and a prominent Add to Cart button.

Why it matters: on long product pages — and especially on mobile — the theme's own Add to cart button scrolls out of view. Every scroll back up is a chance to drop off. A sticky bar removes that friction, which is why it reliably lifts add-to-cart rates.

","What is Ego Sticky Add to Cart?","c7e351b79e8ef53cb9495abfc","Billing timing, failed payments, cancellations, portal access, inventory, and more.",[1254,1255,1256,1257,1258,1259,1260,1261,1262,1263],[1251,1252,1253],"subscriptions","Ego Subscriptions","failed-payments-and-retries","customer-portal","importing-existing-subscriptions",{"_158":1291,"_193":1292,"_195":1293},{"_158":1288,"_193":1289,"_195":1290},{"_158":1285,"_193":1286,"_195":1287},{"_158":1282,"_193":1283,"_195":1284},{"_158":1279,"_193":1280,"_195":1281},{"_158":1276,"_193":1277,"_195":1278},{"_158":1273,"_193":1274,"_195":1275},{"_158":1270,"_193":1271,"_195":1272},{"_158":1267,"_193":1268,"_195":1269},{"_158":1264,"_193":1265,"_195":1266},"faq-migration","

Yes — CSV-based import under Subscriptions → Import Subscriptions, with our support team assisting the mapping and validation. See Importing Subscriptions from Another App.

","Can I migrate from another subscription app?","faq-branding","

Contact our team via the in-app chat to verify your store — we remove the branding text for free.

","How do I remove the Ego branding under the widget?","faq-portal-login","

With their normal Shopify customer login. New-customer-accounts stores get a native subscriptions section in the account pages; classic stores use the hosted portal link (/apps/ego-portal) — add it to your account menu and navigation so it's easy to find.

","How do customers access the portal?","faq-out-of-stock","

Enable the Out of stock alert (Settings → Email settings) — you'll be emailed when an upcoming order contains an out-of-stock product, so you can restock, or swap/remove the product on the affected contracts before the cycle bills.

","What if a subscribed product goes out of stock?","faq-price-change","

Yes, per contract: open the subscription → products section → Edit Price. You can change it immediately or schedule the change after N billing cycles. Editing the plan itself only affects new subscriptions.

","Can I change the price for existing subscribers?","faq-prepaid","

Pay as you go bills at every delivery (e.g. $25/month). Auto-renew prepaid charges several deliveries upfront — minimum 2 — and renews with another batch (e.g. $75 per 3 months). Prepaid = better cash flow and lower churn; pair it with a bigger discount.

","Pay-as-you-go vs. prepaid — what's the difference?","faq-cancel-limits","

Yes — set Minimum required orders in the plan's advanced settings (cancel only after N orders), and/or disable cancellation in the portal settings so cancellations go through your support. Always state commitments clearly on the product page.

","Can I stop customers from cancelling immediately?","faq-customer-self-service","

Through the customer portal — they log in with their normal store account and manage everything there (skip, pause, address, payment, swaps), limited to the permissions you enabled. If customers say they \"can't find it\", add the portal link to your store navigation and order emails — see The Customer Portal.

","How do customers skip or pause by themselves?","faq-failed-payment","

The app retries automatically per your Billing settings (up to 6 retries, 1–10 days apart) and emails the customer a payment-update link on each failed attempt. After the last retry it executes your configured action: skip the cycle (default), pause, or cancel. You can also fix it manually: send the payment-update link from the contract, then Rebill order in Past Orders. See Failed Payments & Retry Settings.

","What happens if a customer's payment fails?","faq-when-billed","

Renewals are charged automatically once a day at a fixed hour in the store's billing timezone, on each contract's next billing date. You can see and Reschedule that date on the subscription's detail page, or bill immediately with Place Order. Prepaid plans are charged once per prepaid batch, then auto-renew.

","When exactly are customers billed?","c4edd80c2f74c6ab321f22356","widget-not-showing","Widget Not Showing on Product Pages","Work through the causes in order — from most to least common.",[1302,1303,1304,1305,1306,1307],[1300,1301],"installing-ego-subscriptions","widget-customization",{"_158":1321,"_193":1322,"_195":1323},{"_158":1318,"_193":1319,"_195":1320},{"_158":1315,"_193":1316,"_195":1317},{"_158":1312,"_193":1313,"_195":1314},{"_158":1309,"_193":1310,"_195":1311},{"_158":230,"_193":1308,"_195":232},"

Test in an incognito window (rules out caching), and try another product from the plan. If it still doesn't show, contact us via the in-app chat with your store URL and the product link — we'll diagnose it on your actual theme.

","widget-looks-wrong","

If the widget renders but clashes with your theme (overlapping text, wrong fonts, misplaced position):

Move the app block position in the Theme Editor (drag it in the product template).
Use Custom CSS in the widget settings for fine adjustments.
Or just message us via in-app chat — theme-fit adjustments are free.

","Widget shows but looks broken?","check-payments","

Shopify hides subscription options entirely when the store's payment setup doesn't support recurring billing. Check Shopify admin → Settings → Payments: you need Shopify Payments (or another subscription-compatible gateway). This is often the culprit on brand-new stores and development stores.

","4. Payment gateway supports subscriptions?","check-widget-settings","

Under Widgets, confirm:

Show subscription widget on product pages is enabled (the master switch).
At least one layout is active.
If the variant you're viewing is sold out: Show widget on sold out variants is on, or switch to an in-stock variant.

","3. Widget settings","check-plan","

In Subscription plans, open your plan and verify:

Status is Active, not Draft.
The product you're testing is among the selected products — or its collection is among the selected collections. Watch out: a product recently removed from the collection silently drops out of the plan.

The widget only renders on products that belong to at least one active plan.

","2. Is the product actually in an active plan?","check-embed-and-block","

Check the two Dashboard banners first:

App embed inactive → click Activate app embed, toggle Ego Subscriptions on in the Theme Editor's App embeds panel, save.
App block missing → click Add app block and place the block in your product template, save.

Recently published a new theme? Both must be re-enabled on the new theme — this is the most common cause of a widget that \"suddenly disappeared\".

","1. App embed and app block enabled?","c33ece7358f0011c8ddfa2da2","analytics-dashboard","The Analytics Dashboard","Track subscription revenue, growth, MRR, and churn — and know what each number means.",[1333,1334,1335,1336],[1331,1332],"Managing Subscriptions","managing-subscriptions-in-admin","plan-discounts",{"_158":1345,"_193":1346,"_195":1347},{"_158":1343,"_193":1344,"_195":316},{"_158":1340,"_193":1341,"_195":1342},{"_158":1337,"_193":1338,"_195":1339},"order-tags","

Every subscription order is tagged — Ego First Order for initial purchases, Ego Recurring Order for renewals — so you can segment any Shopify report, build custom analytics, or drive Flow automations from your real order data.

","Deeper analysis in Shopify","how-to-read","

MRR up + cancellation rate steady — healthy growth; keep acquiring.
New subscriptions up but recurring revenue flat — churn is eating growth; look at the cancellation rate and consider an escalating discount (see Subscribe & Save Discounts).
Recurring ≫ first-time revenue — a mature base; protect it with solid dunning settings and the upcoming-order email.

","How to read the numbers","metrics","

Metric	Meaning
Subscription revenue	Gross subscription revenue minus discounts, shipping, and taxes for the period.
First-time order revenue	Revenue from customers' first subscription orders — how well you're acquiring subscribers.
Recurring order revenue	Revenue from automatic renewals — how well you're retaining them.
New subscriptions	Contracts created in the period.
Subscription growth	New + reactivated − cancelled, vs. the previous period.
Cancellation rate	Share of subscriptions cancelled in the period.
Total active subscriptions	Contracts currently active.
Monthly recurring revenue (MRR)	All active contracts normalized to a monthly value regardless of frequency — a weekly $10 plan counts ≈ $43/month. The single best health metric to watch.
Expected collections next 30 days	Projected recurring revenue over the next 30 days — near-term cash-flow forecast.
Lifetime subscription revenue	All-time subscription revenue.

","where-to-find","

The app's home Dashboard shows your subscription analytics with a time-range selector (yesterday, last 7 / 30 / 90 days). Figures can be shown in your store currency using daily exchange rates.

","Where to find it","c14b7863be2ffebeaf5a9f48e","email-notifications","Email Notifications","Every email the app can send, when it fires, and how to configure each one.",[1354,1355,1356],[1251,1252],{"_158":1363,"_193":1364,"_195":1365},{"_158":1360,"_193":1361,"_195":1362},{"_158":1357,"_193":1358,"_195":1359},"merchant-emails","

Email	When it's sent
Out of stock alert	A product in an upcoming subscription order is out of stock — restock or swap the product before the next cycle bills.
Charge confirmation	A recurring order was charged successfully.
Failed charge notification	A charge could not be processed.

Minimum recommended set: upcoming order + billing failed for customers, out of stock for you. These three prevent the most revenue loss.

","Store owner notifications","customer-emails","

Email	When it's sent	Why keep it on
Subscription activation	When the customer first subscribes.	Confirms the deal (frequency, discount) and sets expectations.
Subscription upcoming order	Before the next charge — 2 days by default, adjustable per contract via Email Buffer Days.	The customer's chance to skip or edit before being billed — the single best defense against refunds and chargebacks.
Subscription order confirmation	When a recurring order is placed successfully.	Reassurance + a natural portal entry point.
Billing failed	When a charge fails, including a final-attempt warning explaining what happens next.	Contains the payment-update link — this is how failed payments get fixed.
Subscription cancellation	When the subscription is cancelled.	Closure + win-back opportunity.
Pause / resume confirmations	When the subscription is paused or resumed.	Prevents \"am I still being charged?\" tickets.

","Customer notifications","email-settings","

Go to Settings → Email settings. A master switch enables subscription emails; below it, each notification type has its own toggle so you control exactly what gets sent. These emails are sent by the app — they complement (not replace) Shopify's own order confirmation emails.

","Turning emails on","c8356864bc9d14ce91e79cbce","Failed Payments & Retry Settings","What happens when a charge fails, how to configure dunning, and how to recover revenue.",[1372,1373,1374,1375],[1349,1371],"upcoming-and-past-orders",{"_158":1385,"_193":1386,"_195":1387},{"_158":1382,"_193":1383,"_195":1384},{"_158":1379,"_193":1380,"_195":1381},{"_158":1376,"_193":1377,"_195":1378},"recovering","

Your recovery toolkit:

Filter the subscription list by Failed to see every affected contract.
On the contract, use Send link to update payment method — the customer fixes the card in one click.
Once fixed, open Past Orders and click Rebill order on the failed cycle (each cycle shows its attempt count and last attempt date).

","Recovering failed payments manually","final-action","

Action	What happens	Choose when…
Skip billing cycle (default)	The failed cycle is marked \"Billing failed\"; the next cycle proceeds as scheduled.	You'd rather keep the subscriber and lose one order.
Pause subscription	Billing stops until you or the customer resume.	You want an explicit re-engagement moment.
Cancel subscription	The contract ends.	You don't want unpaid contracts lingering.

","Choosing the final action","retry-settings","

Go to Settings → Billing settings:

Retry failed payments — the master toggle. Turn it on; without it a single card hiccup silently costs you the order.
Maximum number of retry attempts — 1 to 6 (default 3).
Delay before retrying — 1 to 10 days between attempts (default 1).
Send an email if a billing retry attempt fails — keep on; the email contains the payment-update link, which is how most failures get fixed.

Recommended starting point: 3–4 attempts, 2–3 days apart — spans a payday cycle without dragging on for weeks.

","Configuring retries","what-happens-on-failure","

Expired cards and insufficient funds are normal in subscriptions — what matters is recovering them automatically. With retries enabled, a typical timeline looks like this:

Day 0 — the scheduled charge fails. The contract shows under the Failed tab; the customer gets a \"payment failed\" email (if enabled) with a link to update their payment method.
Day 1, 2, … — the app retries automatically per your settings, notifying the customer on each failed attempt. The final-attempt email tells them exactly what happens if it fails again.
After the last retry — the app executes your chosen final action: skip the cycle, pause, or cancel the subscription.

If the customer fixes their card at any point, the next retry succeeds and the contract returns to normal.

","What happens when a payment fails","c3c2a61832a9e4afbc506e9e3","Upcoming & Past Orders","Place, reschedule, skip, and rebill recurring orders — and read the billing history.",[1393,1394,1395],[1331,1349],{"_158":1402,"_193":1403,"_195":1404},{"_158":1399,"_193":1400,"_195":1401},{"_158":1396,"_193":1397,"_195":1398},"email-buffer","

Two per-contract controls fine-tune the reminder emails:

Email Buffer Days — how many days before billing the customer's upcoming-order reminder goes out (default 2). Give prepaid or high-value contracts a longer buffer so customers have time to skip or edit.
Stop sending upcoming order emails — mute reminders for this one contract only (e.g. at the customer's request).

","Per-subscription email controls","past-orders","

The Past Orders tab is the billing history. Each row shows the order number, products, the originally expected renewal date, how many billing attempts were made and when, and a status:

Status	Meaning
Paid	Charged successfully; the Shopify order exists.
Billed / Unbilled	Whether the cycle has been processed by billing yet.
Skipped	The cycle was skipped (by you or the customer).
Cancelled	The cycle was cancelled with the contract.

The first order carries a \"First order\" badge. For any cycle that failed to bill, click Rebill order to retry the charge manually — useful after a customer fixes their payment method.

","Past orders — reading the history","upcoming-orders","

The Upcoming Orders tab lists the future billing cycles of a contract: products, next order date, total, email buffer days, and status (Queued or Skipped). Three actions per cycle:

Place order — bill this cycle right now. Use when a customer asks to \"send it early\".
Reschedule — pick a new date and time for the charge. If the new date collides with an active payment-retry (dunning) process, the app shows a warning first — resolve the failed payment before moving the date.
Skip order — skip this cycle entirely; billing resumes with the next one. The cycle shows as Skipped, nothing is charged.

","Upcoming orders","c6f9d40b371a9f590bd2f25bd","Managing Subscriptions in Admin","Find any contract and handle the everyday tasks — recipes included.",[1410,1411,1412,1413],[1371,1251],{"_158":1423,"_193":1424,"_195":1425},{"_158":1420,"_193":1421,"_195":1422},{"_158":1417,"_193":1418,"_195":1419},{"_158":1414,"_193":1415,"_195":1416},"contract-discounts","

Customer emailing to cancel? From the Discounts card, create a targeted discount: code, Percentage or Fixed Amount, and a Recurring Cycle Limit (e.g. 50% off the next 2 orders). It applies automatically to this contract's coming cycles — a proven save-offer that costs less than losing the subscriber.

","Save offers with discounts","edit-products","

From the products section of the detail page you can, per line item:

Add product — on an existing plan or a custom one-off plan.
Edit Quantity / Edit Variant (e.g. customer wants a different size).
Edit Price — set a base price, or schedule a price change after N billing cycles (percentage, fixed discount, or fixed price per unit).
Swap Product — replace it with another product entirely.
Remove Product, or Skip Items on a specific upcoming date.

Changes apply to future orders of this contract only — other subscribers are unaffected.

","Editing the products on a contract","common-tasks","

Task	How
Pause a subscription	Detail page → header → Pause (confirm). Resume the same way with Resume.
Bill right now	Header → Place Order — charges the next cycle immediately.
Skip the next delivery	Header → Skip Next Order (or skip any specific cycle from the Upcoming Orders tab).
Customer's card expired	Payment info card → Send link to update payment method — the customer gets a secure Shopify link, no card data passes through you.
Change the shipping address	Shipping card → Select Address or edit — applies to all future orders of this contract.
Change how often it ships	Detail tab → edit the delivery policy (frequency).
Leave an internal note	Merchant notes (only you see it) vs. Customer notes (customer-visible).

","Everyday task recipes","subscription-list","

The Subscriptions page lists every contract: ID, customer, status, creation date, frequency, next order date, total, and order count. To find one fast:

Filter by status tab: All / Active / Paused / Failed / Cancelled.
Search by Subscription ID, or filter by customer (name/email).

Click a row to open the detail page — four tabs: Detail, Past Orders, Upcoming Orders, and Activity Logs (a full audit trail: who changed what, when).

","Finding a subscription","cc84d2d0819e17e0da548edb7","translations","Translating Widget & Portal Text","Localize every customer-facing string — step by step.",[1433,1434],[1301,1252],"Storefront & Customer Portal",{"_158":1438,"_193":1439,"_195":1440},{"_158":1435,"_193":1436,"_195":1437},"how-to-translate","

Make sure the target language is published in Shopify (Settings → Languages).
Open Translations in the app and pick the locale.
Edit each string and save.

Translations are stored through Shopify's native translation system, so the storefront automatically shows the right language to each customer based on the locale they're browsing in — no extra configuration.

Single-language store? You can still use this page to reword any widget text (e.g. change \"Subscribe & save\" to \"Never run out\"). The admin interface itself is available in English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish.

","How to translate","what-can-be-translated","

The Translations page covers all customer-facing widget strings: \"Purchase Options\", \"One-time purchase\", \"Subscribe & Save\", \"Auto Renew Prepaid\", the discount badge, \"Delivery frequency\", \"Subscription details\", the tooltip title and description — plus the selling-plan names customers see.

","What can be translated","ca760b0d0e4dfc1321538b77e","build-a-box","Build a Box","Let customers assemble their own subscription box — setup from start to finish.",[1448,1449,1450],[1301,1447],"create-your-first-plan",{"_158":1457,"_193":1458,"_195":1459},{"_158":1454,"_193":1455,"_195":1456},{"_158":1451,"_193":1452,"_195":1453},"design-and-publish","

Switch to the Design tab to match your brand: colors, typography, and borders, with a live preview. Then set the box status to Active and share it:

Copy the box's URL from the admin and link it from your navigation, homepage banner, or ads.
The box storefront experience runs on the same app embed as the widget — no additional theme setup.

Test the whole flow once yourself: build a box, subscribe, and check the created contract under Subscriptions — box contracts are managed exactly like regular ones.

","Step 2 — Design and publish","configure-setting","

Create a box under Build a box and work through the Setting tab:

Pricing — choose Dynamic pricing box: the box price is the sum of the selected products (updated live as the customer picks). A fixed-price box option is coming soon.
Layout — Cart panel or Box drawer; pick what fits your theme better (you can switch later).
Products — show all products or organize them by category. Set the total items per box (e.g. exactly 6) and optional per-product min/max quantities (e.g. max 2 of any single flavor).
Purchase options — attach one or more subscription plans (Pay as you go or Auto-renew prepaid with delivery frequency and discount, same as regular plans) and optionally allow one-time purchase.
Discount tiers — reward bigger boxes: e.g. 6 items → 10% off, 9 items → 15% off. The reward bar shows customers how close they are to the next tier.
Summary step — after the box is full, send customers to the Cart page or a checkout drawer.

","Step 1 — Configure the box (Setting tab)","what-is-build-a-box","

Build a box lets customers assemble a personalized bundle: they pick products from your curated selection, fill the box to the size you define, and subscribe to it (or buy once, if you allow it). A progress bar and reward messages (\"Add 2 more to get 10% off!\") guide them along. Typical uses: snack boxes, coffee samplers, pet-treat bundles, cosmetics kits.

","What is Build a Box?","c0374ee5e0a7987ad69f3de4d","The Customer Portal","Set up self-service for subscribers and control exactly what they can do.",[1465,1466,1467,1468,1469,1470],[1301,1349,1331],{"_158":1486,"_193":1487,"_195":1488},{"_158":1483,"_193":1484,"_195":1485},{"_158":1480,"_193":1481,"_195":1482},{"_158":1477,"_193":1478,"_195":1479},{"_158":1474,"_193":1475,"_195":1476},{"_158":1471,"_193":1472,"_195":1473},"test-portal","

Create a test subscription with your own email, then log in on the storefront as that customer and open the portal. Verify you can see the subscription, skip an order, and edit the address. What you see is exactly what your customers get.

","Step 4 — Test as a customer","portal-permissions","

Every capability is a toggle, grouped in the portal settings:

Subscription settings — allow editing delivery frequency / shipping address / payment info; disable pause, reactivation, or cancellation.
Order settings — \"Order now\" button, skip next order, skip any order, change next delivery date, view order history.
Product settings — add new products, swap products or variants, change quantities, remove products, skip specific products.
Discount settings — allow one-time product discounts in the portal.
Subscription info — show original price & discount percentage.

Recommended baseline: allow skip, pause, address and payment edits (they prevent cancellations and failed payments); think twice before disabling cancellation — customers who can't cancel call their bank instead.

","Step 3 — Set the permissions","what-customers-can-do","

Depending on the permissions you enable, customers can: view active and past subscriptions with upcoming orders and full order history; pause / resume / cancel; skip orders; reschedule the next delivery; change delivery frequency; edit the shipping address; update the payment method; add, swap, or remove products; change quantities; trigger an order now; and apply discount codes.

","What subscribers can do","portal-setup","

For the new customer accounts version, the app page includes a Go to theme shortcut that opens the customer-account editor — confirm the subscriptions page is visible there.

For the classic portal, add the link where customers will look for it:

Copy the portal URL from the app.
Shopify admin → Online Store → Navigation → add a menu item \"Manage subscription\" pointing to the URL (footer menu and/or account menu).
Optional: also link it from your order-confirmation emails.

","Step 2 — Make the portal reachable","two-portal-versions","

Configure both under Customer portal in the app:

New customer accounts (recommended if your store uses Shopify's new customer accounts): subscriptions appear natively inside the customer's account pages. To check which accounts you use: Shopify admin → Settings → Customer accounts.
Classic portal: a hosted portal at your-store.com/apps/ego-portal. The admin shows the link with a copy button.

In both cases customers sign in with their normal Shopify customer login — there are no separate passwords to manage.

","Step 1 — Choose your portal version","why-portal","

Most subscription support tickets are \"skip my next order\", \"change my address\", \"pause for a month\". The customer portal lets subscribers do all of this themselves — fewer tickets for you, and customers who can pause or skip are far less likely to cancel outright.

","Why the portal matters","cba2d8e65c831bec8af43276e","Customizing the Product Page Widget","Layouts, behavior, texts, and styling of the subscription options — step by step.",[1494,1495,1496,1497,1498],[1300,1427,1295],{"_158":1511,"_193":1512,"_195":1513},{"_158":1508,"_193":1509,"_195":1510},{"_158":1505,"_193":1506,"_195":1507},{"_158":1502,"_193":1503,"_195":1504},{"_158":1499,"_193":1500,"_195":1501},"widget-language","

All customer-facing strings — \"Purchase Options\", \"One-time Purchase\", \"Subscribe & save\", \"Delivery frequency\", the discount badge, tooltips — are editable and translatable per language on the Translations page (see Translating Widget & Portal Text).

New stores show a small Ego branding line under the widget. Contact our team via in-app chat to verify your store and we remove it for free.

","Texts, languages, and branding","custom-css-js","

If the widget needs pixel-perfect matching with your theme, the settings accept Custom CSS and Custom JS — no theme code edits required. If you're not comfortable writing CSS, message us via the in-app chat: our team adjusts the widget to your theme for free.

","Advanced: Custom CSS & JS","general-settings","

Widget-wide behavior settings, with our recommendations:

Setting	What it does
Default purchase option	Which option is preselected: One-time purchase, Pay as you go, or Auto-renew prepaid. Preselecting the subscription lifts subscriber conversion — test it.
Show subscription option before one-time	Puts the subscription on top of the list.
Show subscription widget on product pages	The master visibility switch — keep on.
Show information tooltip icon	Adds a \"Subscription details\" tooltip; write its title and description yourself (how billing works, how to cancel — reduces hesitation).
Show widget on sold out variants	Whether the widget renders when the variant is out of stock.
Auto-update price on quantity change	Recalculates the shown price when the customer changes quantity.
Add to cart button text	Customize the CTA text.

","Step 3 — Set the behavior","layout-editor","

The editor has three tabs:

Widget — the container: borders, divider color and thickness, background, icons, and the selected vs. unselected option states.
Options — each purchase option's label, price, compare-at price, and description: font, size, weight, and color, plus margins and the discount badge.
Delivery Frequency — the frequency selector's look.

Element sizes scale from 1x to 3x. Every change updates the preview instantly; nothing goes live until you save.

","Step 2 — Style it","widget-layouts","

Go to Widgets. Three layouts are available, each fully customizable:

Default Layout — purchase options stacked in a vertical list. The safest choice; works with virtually every theme.
Divider Layout — options side by side in equal-width columns. Good when you have exactly two options (one-time vs. subscribe).
Grid Layout — options arranged in a grid. Good for several frequency plans.

At least one layout must stay active. Click Customize on your chosen layout to open the editor with a live preview.

","Step 1 — Choose a layout","cc87fac5f65e2dad2cd82d968","advanced-plan-settings","Advanced Plan Settings & Shipping Profiles","Minimum orders before cancelling, automatic plan expiry, and subscription-only shipping rates.",[1522,1523,1524],[1447,1521],"Subscription Plans","payment-types-and-frequency",{"_158":1531,"_193":1532,"_195":1533},{"_158":1528,"_193":1529,"_195":1530},{"_158":1525,"_193":1526,"_195":1527},"shipping-profiles","

Want subscribers to get cheaper (or free) delivery without touching your store-wide shipping? Create a subscription shipping profile:

Go to Settings → Shipping profile and create a profile — name it, define zones and rates (e.g. \"Subscription shipping — $2 flat\" or free).
Open your plan and attach the profile in the Shipping profile step of the builder.

That's it — you don't add products to the profile manually; linking it to the plan is enough. Orders from that plan then use the profile's rates instead of your default shipping.

","Shipping profiles for subscriptions","max-orders","

Maximum allowed orders ends the subscription automatically after N successful orders — no manual cleanup, no accidental extra billing.

When to use it: fixed-length programs — a 6-month coffee tasting course, a 12-week training box. When the last order is billed, the contract completes on its own.

Each contract's detail page shows its successful-order count against both limits, so you always know where a customer stands.

","Maximum allowed orders","min-orders","

In a plan's Advanced settings, Minimum required orders means customers can cancel only after completing N orders.

When to use it: you're giving a big first-order discount (say 40% off the first box) and need at least 3 orders to make the economics work. Set minimum = 3; the portal simply won't offer cancellation until the third order is delivered.

Be transparent — state the commitment clearly on the product page (\"3-month minimum\") to avoid support tickets and chargebacks.

","Minimum required orders","c2413d646ea1a3efb41962484","Subscribe & Save Discounts","Plan discounts, escalating loyalty discounts, per-customer discounts, and stacking rules.",[1539,1540,1541,1542],[1521,1331],{"_158":1551,"_193":1552,"_195":1553},{"_158":1548,"_193":1549,"_195":1550},{"_158":1545,"_193":1546,"_195":1547},{"_158":1414,"_193":1543,"_195":1544},"

You can also discount one specific customer's subscription — the classic \"save offer\" when someone wants to cancel:

Open the subscription under Subscriptions.
In the Discounts card, click create discount.
Set the code, choose Percentage or Fixed Amount, and set the Recurring Cycle Limit — how many upcoming orders it applies to (e.g. 50% off the next 2 orders).

The discount applies automatically to that contract's next cycles and can be removed at any time.

","Discounts for a single subscriber","discount-combinations","

Subscription pricing is applied through an automatic app discount. Under Settings → Discount settings you decide how it plays with your other promotions:

Enable automatic app discount — the master switch.
Combine with product discounts / order discounts / shipping discounts — three independent toggles.

Example: allow combining with shipping discounts (so subscribers can use your free-shipping code) but not with product discounts (so a 20%-off sale doesn't stack on top of the subscriber discount).

","Stacking with other discounts","tiered-discount","

Enable Change discount after X orders to grow the reward the longer someone stays subscribed:

Set the initial discount (e.g. 10%).
Set after how many orders it changes (e.g. after 3 orders).
Set the new discount (e.g. 15%).

Result: \"10% off your first 3 orders, then 15% off forever.\" This directly attacks the most common churn window (months 2–4) — customers see a concrete reason to stay.

","Escalating discount — reward loyalty","plan-discount","

To give subscribers a discount on every delivery:

Open the plan (Subscription plans → your plan → edit the plan entry).
Enable Offer incentives.
Choose Percentage (e.g. 15% off every order) or Fixed amount (e.g. $5 off every order).

The widget automatically shows the discounted price next to the crossed-out regular price plus a \"Save X%\" badge — no discount codes needed, the price is simply lower at checkout.

","The plan discount","c920861241e878bece4303d25","Payment Types & Delivery Frequency","Pay as you go vs. auto-renew prepaid, billing schedules, and renewal anchors — with examples.",[1559,1560,1561,1562],[1447,1251],{"_158":1572,"_193":1573,"_195":1574},{"_158":1569,"_193":1570,"_195":1571},{"_158":1566,"_193":1567,"_195":1568},{"_158":1563,"_193":1564,"_195":1565},"billing-time","

The app charges renewals automatically once per day at a fixed hour in your store's billing timezone. On a contract's billing day, the charge runs, Shopify creates the order, and the next billing date advances by the plan's frequency. You can watch and control all of this per contract:

The next billing date is shown on the subscription's detail page — and you can Reschedule it.
Place Order bills a cycle immediately instead of waiting.
If a charge fails, the retry system takes over — see Failed Payments & Retry Settings.

Every order is tagged in Shopify: Ego First Order on the initial purchase, Ego Recurring Order on renewals. Use these tags to filter orders, build reports, or trigger Shopify Flow automations.

","When exactly are customers charged?","renewal-anchors","

Fine-tune when recurring orders happen:

Cutoff days — how many days before the billing date changes are locked. Example: with a 3-day cutoff, a customer editing their order 2 days before billing affects the following cycle, not the imminent one. Leave \"Unset\" if you don't need it.
Renewal day — anchor renewals to the same weekday as the first order (good for weekly plans: \"always ships Monday\") or the same day of month (good for monthly: \"always the 15th\").
Renewal month — for yearly plans: renew in the same month as the initial order, or pin a specific month.

","Cutoff and renewal anchors","delivery-frequency","

Each plan has one frequency: every N days, weeks, months, or years (e.g. every 2 weeks, every 3 months). To offer customers a choice of frequencies, add multiple plans to the same group — the widget shows them as a \"Delivery frequency\" selector.

Enable Show frequency description to add your own explanation under the plan name — useful for prepaid plans (\"Billed every 3 months, ships monthly\").

","Delivery frequency","payment-types","

Type	How billing works	Example
Pay as you go	The customer is charged at every delivery, at the delivery frequency.	$25 coffee bag, delivered and billed every month. Customer pays $25/month until they cancel.
Auto-renew prepaid	The customer pays for several deliveries upfront (minimum 2). When the prepaid batch runs out, the subscription automatically renews with another prepaid batch.	3-month prepaid: customer pays $75 today, receives 3 monthly deliveries, then is charged $75 again for the next 3.

Which to choose? Pay as you go is simpler and converts better for first-time subscribers. Prepaid gives you cash upfront and lower churn — pair it with a bigger discount to make the upfront payment worth it. You can offer both as separate plans and let customers choose.

","The two payment types","c6ed2cafc2b56dc5a23dfed40","Importing Subscriptions from Another App","Migrate existing contracts with a CSV file — reviewed, selective, and support-assisted.",[1580,1581,1582],[1331,1447],{"_158":1588,"_193":1589,"_195":1590},{"_158":1585,"_193":1586,"_195":1587},{"_158":634,"_193":1583,"_195":1584},"

Payment methods: whether stored payment methods carry over depends on your gateway (Shopify Payments customers keep their cards; imported contracts from external gateways may require the customer to confirm payment). Our team will confirm this for your specific setup before you migrate.
Next billing dates are preserved from the CSV — double-check a few so nobody gets billed early.
Turn off billing in the old app before migrating, so customers aren't charged twice.

Migrations touch live billing — we strongly recommend doing them together with our team via the in-app chat. We'll validate your CSV and watch the first billing cycles with you.

","Important notes","review-and-migrate","

Uploaded rows land in the Not yet migrated tab, showing each subscription's ID, customer name and email, status, frequency, next billing date, and total price. Check a few rows against your old app to confirm the mapping looks right.

Then either:

select specific rows and click Migrate Subscriptions, or
click Migrate All — with the option to migrate only active and paused subscriptions (recommended; cancelled contracts usually aren't worth importing).

Migrated rows move to the Migrated tab so you always know what's done.

","Review before migrating","how-migration-works","

Switching from another subscription app (Recharge, Appstle, Seal, etc.)? Your existing subscriber contracts can be imported so billing continues without interruption. The flow:

Export your subscriptions from the current app (every major app has a CSV export).
Prepare the CSV following our template — the import page links it, and the banner reminds you: contact support if you need help mapping your columns.
Upload the file under Subscriptions → Import Subscriptions.
Review and migrate — nothing goes live until you explicitly migrate rows.

","How migration works","cfa1a7c46cfedf830f2a91b89","Create Your First Subscription Plan","A full walkthrough: products, frequency, discount — with a worked example.",[1596,1597,1598,1599,1600,1601],[1521,1332,1295],{"_158":591,"_193":1617,"_195":593},{"_158":1614,"_193":1615,"_195":1616},{"_158":1611,"_193":1612,"_195":1613},{"_158":1608,"_193":1609,"_195":1610},{"_158":1605,"_193":1606,"_195":1607},{"_158":1602,"_193":1603,"_195":1604},"test-it","

Open any product from the selected collection on your storefront. You should see the purchase options widget with:

One-time purchase at the normal price, and
your plan (\"Deliver every month — save 15%\") at the discounted price.

Select the subscription, add to cart, and check out — Shopify will ask for a subscription-capable payment method. The new contract then appears under Subscriptions in the app.

If the widget doesn't appear, walk through Widget Not Showing on Product Pages — it's almost always the app embed, plan status, or payment gateway.

","Step 5 — Test on your storefront","activate","

Save the plan and check its status in the plan list — it must be Active (a Draft plan is saved but invisible to customers). The list shows every plan with its products/variants count, purchase type, and quick actions to Duplicate, Delete, or toggle status.

","Step 4 — Save and activate","add-a-plan","

Click Add subscription plan and fill in:

Plan name — this is the text customers see in the widget. Write it from their perspective: \"Deliver every month — save 15%\".
Payment type — choose Pay as you go (billed at each delivery — right for our example) or Auto-renew prepaid (customer pays several deliveries upfront). Details in Payment Types & Delivery Frequency.
Delivery frequency — 1 month for our example. Any combination of a number + days/weeks/months/years works.
Offer incentives — enable it, choose Percentage, enter 15. The preview now shows a \"Save 15%\" badge and the discounted price.

Optionally enable Show frequency description to add your own explanatory line under the plan name.

You can add several plans to the same group — e.g. \"Every 2 weeks — save 10%\" and \"Every month — save 15%\". Customers pick their frequency in the widget dropdown.

","Step 3 — Add the subscription plan","select-products","

Choose which items can be subscribed to:

Specific selected products — pick individual products (and, if you want, only certain variants). Best when you're starting with a few hero products.
Product in selected collections — every product in the chosen collections is subscribable. Best for whole categories like \"Coffee\" — new products added to the collection are covered automatically.

For our example, we select the Coffee collection. At least one product is required — the builder won't save without it.

","Step 2 — Select products","start-a-plan","

Go to Subscription plans and click Create new plan. The plan builder opens with a setup sidebar showing three steps:

Select products (required)
Plans — the actual subscription option(s)
Shipping profile (optional)

A preview panel on the right shows the plan exactly as customers will see it in the widget, updating as you type.

","Step 1 — Start a new plan","

Let's build a classic \"subscribe & save\" plan as a worked example: customers subscribing to any coffee product get a delivery every month and save 15% on each order. You can adapt every step to your own products.

","c7a1ad7f3727cc97a1c00853a","Installing & Activating Ego Subscriptions","Install the app, enable the app embed and app block, and verify everything is ready.",[1624,1625,1626,1627,1628,1629],"5 min",[1447,1301,1295],{"_158":1638,"_193":1639,"_195":1640},{"_158":783,"_193":1636,"_195":1637},{"_158":613,"_193":1635,"_195":615},{"_158":1632,"_193":1633,"_195":1634},{"_158":607,"_193":1631,"_195":609},{"_158":604,"_193":1630,"_195":606},"

Before announcing subscriptions to your customers, verify:

☑ Both Dashboard banners (app embed + app block) show Active.
☑ At least one subscription plan has status Active and contains the right products.
☑ On the storefront, the product page shows \"One-time purchase\" and your subscription option with the discounted price.
☑ A test checkout works — place a small subscription order yourself, then cancel it from Subscriptions in the admin.

","

The Dashboard side guide tracks the three launch steps:

Create a subscription plan — see Create Your First Subscription Plan for a full walkthrough.
Choose a widget style — pick and brand a widget layout under Widgets.
Preview in store — open a product that's in your plan and check the widget live.

There's also a video tutorial on the Dashboard, and the in-app chat connects you to our team 24/7 if anything is unclear.

","enable-app-embed-and-block","

Two theme components make the widget render. The Dashboard shows a status banner for each, so you always know what's missing:

A. App embed (the engine):

On the Dashboard, click Activate app embed. Your Theme Editor opens on the App embeds panel.
Toggle Ego Subscriptions on.
Click Save (top right of the Theme Editor).

B. App block (the widget's position on the product page):

On the Dashboard, click Add app block. The Theme Editor opens your product template.
In the left panel, the Ego Subscriptions block is added to the product information section — drag it to where the purchase options should sit (usually right above the Add to cart button).
Click Save.

Back on the Dashboard, both banners should now show Active. If one still shows inactive, refresh the page.

","Step 2 — Enable the app embed and app block","

Install Ego Subscriptions from the Shopify App Store and approve the requested permissions. The app opens inside your Shopify admin. In the left navigation you'll find everything you need:

Subscription plans — create and manage your plans.
Subscriptions — every customer contract, with statuses and actions.
Widgets — how the subscription options look on product pages.
Build a box — the box-builder feature.
Customer portal — what subscribers can do by themselves.
Translations — localize every customer-facing text.
Settings — billing retries, emails, discount combinations, shipping profiles.

","

Shopify only allows subscription purchases when your payment setup supports recurring billing. Make sure of two things:

Your store uses Shopify Payments (or PayPal Express / another gateway that Shopify lists as subscription-compatible).
Your checkout currency supports subscriptions in your country.

If the payment gateway doesn't support subscriptions, the widget simply won't render a subscription option — this is the #1 cause of \"widget not showing\" (see Widget Not Showing on Product Pages).

","Before you start","what-is-ego-subscriptions","

Ego Subscriptions adds recurring purchases (\"subscribe & save\") to your Shopify store. Here's the full loop:

You create a subscription plan — which products, how often, and what discount subscribers get.
Customers see a subscription widget on your product pages and choose \"Subscribe & save\" instead of a one-time purchase.
The app bills them automatically on schedule and creates the recurring orders in Shopify.
Customers manage everything themselves (skip, pause, swap, cancel) in a customer portal.
You track performance on the analytics dashboard and manage every contract from the admin.

Failed payments are retried automatically, customers get email notifications at every step, and a Build a Box feature lets shoppers assemble their own subscription bundle.

","What is Ego Subscriptions?","c0e9174bcde23bc947cce4acd","Discount codes, inventory, stacking, scheduling, and more — with practical answers.",[1649,1650,1651,1652,1653,1654,1655,1656,1657],[1647,1648,183],"free-gift","Ego Free Gift","gifts-not-appearing","gift-claim-behavior",{"_158":1681,"_193":1682,"_195":1683},{"_158":1678,"_193":1679,"_195":1680},{"_158":1675,"_193":1676,"_195":1677},{"_158":1072,"_193":1673,"_195":1674},{"_158":1670,"_193":1671,"_195":1672},{"_158":1667,"_193":1668,"_195":1669},{"_158":1664,"_193":1665,"_195":1666},{"_158":1661,"_193":1662,"_195":1663},{"_158":1658,"_193":1659,"_195":1660},"faq-see-results","

Compare Campaign AOV vs. Non-campaign AOV in analytics — offers should lift order value, not just give products away. Per-campaign Views → ATCs → CR shows where the funnel leaks: high views + low ATCs usually means the threshold is too high or the gift isn't motivating.

","How do I know if a campaign is actually working?","faq-limit-abuse","

Add the Customer's order history sub-condition and use its limit a number of uses per customer option — e.g. each customer can redeem the welcome gift once.

","How do I stop the same customer claiming the gift repeatedly?","faq-inventory","

Yes — gifts are real line items on the order (at 100% off), so Shopify tracks their stock and they appear in order exports and fulfillment like any product. Keep an eye on gift stock during big promos; when a gift sells out, swap the gift product in the campaign.

","Do gift orders affect my inventory?","faq-schedule","

Yes — every campaign has a start date/time and an optional end date/time. Set up your seasonal promo days ahead; it activates and expires on its own.

","Can I schedule a campaign in advance?","faq-multiple-campaigns","

Yes. Control the interplay with Priority (lower runs first) and Stop on Match (winner takes all). For milestone campaigns, the distribution rule decides whether customers get all eligible rewards or only the nearest milestone.

","Can I run several campaigns at once?","

Yes — set the claim behavior to Give customers a choice of products to add; the \"Congratulations\" pop-up lets them pick the product and its variant. Auto-add mode is better for variant-less gifts.

","Can customers choose their gift's size or color?","faq-stack","

Yes — the app's automatic discount combines with product, order, and shipping discounts, so customers can use a code and still get the gift. To keep specific promos exclusive, schedule campaigns so they don't overlap, or use Stop on Match + priorities between your own campaigns.

","Can gifts stack with my discount codes?","faq-remove","

Enable Works in reverse in the campaign's advanced settings — the gift is removed automatically when the condition is no longer met. We recommend this on every campaign; without it, shoppers can keep the free gift after emptying their cart.

","What if the customer removes items and no longer qualifies?","faq-code","

No. Gifts are discounted by an automatic Shopify discount (\"Ego Free Gift Discount\") the moment they qualify — the gift shows in the cart already discounted, nothing to type at checkout.

","Do customers need a discount code?","ceb2b690fd48ecb16dbd71f7c","Gifts Not Appearing on Storefront","Symptom-based troubleshooting: work through the exact issue you're seeing.",[1691,1692,1693,1694,1695,1696],[1689,1690],"installing-ego-free-gift","campaign-display-settings",{"_158":1103,"_193":1710,"_195":1711},{"_158":1707,"_193":1708,"_195":1709},{"_158":1704,"_193":1705,"_195":1706},{"_158":1701,"_193":1702,"_195":1703},{"_158":1698,"_193":1699,"_195":1700},{"_158":230,"_193":1697,"_195":232},"

Contact us via the in-app chat with three things: your store URL, the campaign name, and what you expected vs. what happened. We'll test it on your actual theme — response times are fast and theme-fit fixes are free.

","check-conflicts","

If another campaign has Stop on Match and matches the cart first (lower priority number), your campaign is skipped by design. Review priorities under \"Works with other offers\" and either re-order them or remove Stop on Match from the blocking campaign.

","Campaign never fires → check priority conflicts","check-display","

Each surface has its own switch in Step 2:

Product page widget not showing → its theme block must be added once (\"please add the card block on your theme\") — the editor links to the right spot in the Theme Editor.
Cart widget in the wrong place → add the Ego Cart Block to the cart template and position it (see Cart & Theme Integration).
Announcement bar missing on mobile → check its device setting (it can be desktop-only).

","A specific surface is missing → check display settings","gift-not-free","

If the gift lands in the cart at full price:

In the campaign's gift settings, confirm the discount is set (e.g. Percentage = 100).
In Shopify admin → Discounts, confirm the automatic discount Ego Free Gift Discount exists and is active — don't delete or edit it manually; the app manages it.
If it's missing, re-save the campaign to recreate it, or contact support.

","Gift added but not discounted → check the discount","check-campaign","

Open the campaign and verify, in order:

Status is Active (not Draft), start date has passed, end date hasn't.
The cart truly meets the condition — right products (check the applies to targeting: a $100 cart of excluded products won't qualify), full threshold amount, correct quantity.
Sub-conditions aren't excluding you: \"New customer\" excludes you as a repeat buyer; \"Logged out\" excludes you while logged in; a Specific link address campaign only fires when you arrive via that link. Test in an incognito window to simulate a fresh visitor.

","Bar shows but no gift is added → check the campaign conditions","

If no bar, widget, or gift appears anywhere, the app embed is almost certainly off. The Dashboard banner will read that customers \"won't see or receive any gifts on your store.\"

Dashboard → Activate app embed.
Toggle Ego Free Gift on in the Theme Editor's App embeds panel.
Save. Re-check after publishing any new theme — the embed is per-theme.

","Nothing shows at all → check the app embed","ced9b99d059b82145b81e2149","Campaign performance, gift revenue, AOV comparisons — and how the numbers are measured.",[1719,1720,1721],[1717,1718],"Upsell, Bundles & Analytics","upsell-campaigns","create-your-first-campaign",{"_158":1728,"_193":1729,"_195":1730},{"_158":1725,"_193":1726,"_195":1727},{"_158":1722,"_193":1723,"_195":1724},"how-measured","

Metrics are based on paid orders: an order counts as a campaign order when it contains items added by a gift or upsell campaign. Numbers appear in near real time after payment.

Caveats for accounting: revenue is gross at time of payment — refunds and cancellations are not deducted — and multi-currency stores may see slightly approximate conversions. Use Shopify's own reports as the source of truth for finance; use these analytics to compare campaigns.

","How the numbers are measured","analytics-metrics","

The analytics view breaks results down by time range (Today, Yesterday, Last 7 / 30 / 90 days, or custom):

Store & Campaign — Total Revenue, Orders, Store AOV, Campaign AOV, Non-campaign AOV.
Free Gift — Orders with Gift, Gift Revenue, Gift AOV, Non-gift AOV.
Upsell — Orders with Upsell, Upsell Revenue, Upsell AOV, Non-upsell AOV.

The number that matters most: Campaign AOV vs. Non-campaign AOV. If orders that touched a campaign average $85 while others average $60, your offers are adding real value — not just giving margin away.

","Store-level metrics","campaign-list-metrics","

The campaign list shows every campaign side by side:

Views — how many times the campaign's display surfaces were seen.
ATCs — add-to-carts driven by the campaign.
CR — conversion rate.
Used — how many times the offer was redeemed.
Revenue — revenue attributed to the campaign.

The Dashboard summary card shows the headline totals: Offer Revenue, Accepted Orders, and Offer's AOV. Duplicate a campaign, change one variable (threshold, gift, message), and compare the two rows — that's your built-in A/B test.

","Per-campaign metrics","ccc02c09675ee2806c88c810f","bundles","Product Bundles","Combo deals, volume discounts, and mix & match — with current limitations.",[1738,1739],[1717,1737],"widget-catalog",{"_158":1743,"_193":1744,"_195":1745},{"_158":1740,"_193":1741,"_195":1742},"bundle-placement","

Bundles currently display on product pages. Dedicated bundle widgets on the Widgets page are marked coming soon (\"Bundle widgets are on the way\") — appearance options will expand in an upcoming release. Configure and test bundles now; styling depth arrives with the widget release.

","Placement & what's coming","bundle-types","

Type	How it works	Example
Combo bundle	A fixed set of 2–10 products sold together at a deal price.	Camera + bag + SD card, 15% off the set.
Volume discount	Tiered pricing by quantity — up to 10 tiers, discount must grow per tier.	1 pc full price · 2 pcs −10% · 3+ pcs −15%.
Mix & match	Customers assemble their own selection from eligible products to unlock tiered discounts.	\"Pick any 3 sauces — save 20%\".

Bundles are applied through Shopify's native cart transform, so the pricing is correct in cart, checkout, and on the final order — no discount-code tricks.

","The three bundle types","c5db9845ceb1990e0eb2b058f","Upsell Campaigns","Cross-sells, frequently bought together, and post-purchase offers — setup overview.",[1751,1752,1753],[1732,183],{"_158":1760,"_193":1761,"_195":1762},{"_158":1757,"_193":1758,"_195":1759},{"_158":1754,"_193":1755,"_195":1756},"upsell-discounts","

Each upsell can carry its own discount — none, percentage, or fixed amount — applied always or only if the trigger product is in the cart. Upsell widgets have their own catalog on the Widgets page (Upsell tab) for styling, just like the free-gift widgets.

","Upsell discounts & styling","placements","

Each upsell campaign targets one placement:

Product page — below the product details.
Cart page — last chance before checkout.
Pop-up — triggered at key moments, with configurable trigger and frequency.
Checkout page — inside Shopify checkout.
Post-purchase — a one-click offer between payment and the thank-you page; the customer accepts without re-entering payment. Supports a funnel of up to three sequenced offers (first, second, downsell) with a countdown.
Thank-you page — after the order completes.

Checkout and post-purchase placements require Shopify's Checkout Extensibility. On stores without it, those campaigns save but won't display until the store is upgraded — the editor warns you.

","The six placements","upsell-overview","

Create an Upsell campaign from Campaign → Create campaign → Upsell. Three offer types:

Cross-sell — recommend related products (\"You may also like\").
Frequently bought together — a combo suggestion with optional volume tiers.
Product add-on — small extras attached to a main product (gift wrap, batteries, warranty).

For each, recommendations are manual (you pick exactly which products appear) or automated (related/complementary products chosen for you — less setup, good for large catalogs).

","The three upsell offer types","c6fb91a2ac1829181e1ca536b","cart-theme-integration","Cart & Theme Integration","Position the cart widget precisely, work with cart drawers, and localize.",[1770,1771,1772],[1737,1647],"Widgets & Display",{"_158":1779,"_193":1780,"_195":1781},{"_158":1776,"_193":1777,"_195":1778},{"_158":1773,"_193":1774,"_195":1775},"localization","

All widget texts are authored by you, so write them in your storefront's language — including the dynamic-token strings. On multilingual stores the app also publishes localized product data per locale, so gift names resolve correctly in each language. The admin interface itself is available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese.

","Languages & localization","cart-drawer","

If your theme uses a slide-out cart drawer (most modern themes do), enable the Offer on slide cart widget — it renders gift campaigns and progress inside the drawer, so shoppers see how close they are to the reward at the exact moment they're deciding whether to keep shopping.

","Cart drawers","cart-block","

By default the gift/reward widget mounts automatically on the cart page. To control exactly where it renders:

Open the Theme Editor on your cart template.
Add the Ego Cart Block app block and drag it to the desired position (e.g. right above the checkout button).
Save — the widget now renders wherever the block sits.

Power users can instead set a custom mount CSS selector in the app embed's settings to attach the widget to any element of the theme — useful for heavily customized carts.

","Positioning the widget on the cart page","cdc6f7e9cac598e1faf9a1f4f","The Widget Catalog","Eight storefront widgets, styled once globally — what each is for and how to customize.",[1788,1789],"Jul 15, 2026",[1690,1764],{"_158":1793,"_193":1794,"_195":1795},{"_158":1790,"_193":1791,"_195":1792},"styling-tips","

Colors are hex values (\"Enter a valid hex color e.g. #D4D4D4\") — copy them from your theme settings for a perfect match.
Check the mobile preview before saving; bars and badges behave differently on small screens.
Start from the milestone bar and announcement bar — they're the surfaces customers see most.

","Styling tips","how-widgets-work","

The Widgets page (Free Gift tab) holds the global appearance of each storefront element. Each widget exists once per store: style it once and every campaign using it inherits the design — your storefront stays consistent no matter how many campaigns run.

Click Customize on any widget to open its editor: Content and Color style tabs (plus Typography/Countdown where relevant), a live desktop/mobile preview.

","How widgets work","ca2b91cb483157413f8a024ba","Campaign Display Settings","Step 2 of every campaign: each display surface explained, with setup notes.",[1801,1802,1803],[1737,1648],{"_158":1810,"_193":1811,"_195":1812},{"_158":1807,"_193":1808,"_195":1809},{"_158":1804,"_193":1805,"_195":1806},"dynamic-tokens","

Titles and subtitles support live tokens that always show the campaign's real numbers:

{{trigger_value}} — the spend threshold: \"Spend {{trigger_value}} to get a free gift!\" renders as \"Spend $100 to get a free gift!\".
{{trigger_quantity}} — the quantity threshold.

The product page widget also has a separate \"Subtitle when reached\" — switch the message once the goal is met (\"🎉 Your free gift is in the cart!\").

","Dynamic text tokens","announcement-bar","

The announcement bar is the workhorse. Configure:

Where: every page, home, product, or cart pages; device — desktop & mobile, only desktop, or only mobile.
Type: simple bar, whole bar clickable, or bar with a link/button (set the URL, button label, button-vs-link style, open in new tab).
Position: top or bottom of the screen; sticky or scrolls away; optional close icon.
Countdown timer: fixed duration in minutes (restarts per visitor) or a specific end date. When it runs out choose: Restart, Hide announcement bar, Show custom title (e.g. \"Offer ended — see what's next\"), or Do nothing.

","Announcement bar — all the options","display-surfaces","

Step 2: Display setting controls how each campaign announces itself. Enable any combination:

Surface	What it does	Setup notes
Notification	A toast when the gift is added to the cart.	Just toggle on; text customizable.
Pop-up	The gift picker on the cart page (\"Congratulations! You've unlocked a free gift\").	Used automatically with choose-your-gift claim mode.
Announcement bar	A store-wide banner promoting the offer.	Most configurable — see below.
Product page widget	An offer card on product pages.	Requires adding its theme block once: the editor prompts \"please add the card block on your theme\" with a link to the Theme Editor.
Promotion badge	A small floating badge.	Choose all pages or specific pages (home/product/collection).
Reward widget placement	(Milestone campaigns) where the progress bar shows.	Cart and/or product pages — all products, offer products only, or specific collections.

","The display surfaces","c014321bb1e642846198d3862","Gift Claim Behavior","Auto-add vs. let-them-choose, gift limits, and keeping carts honest with Works in reverse.",[1820,1821,1822],[1690,1819],"Gift Campaigns","cart-value-quantity-gifts",{"_158":1829,"_193":1830,"_195":1831},{"_158":1826,"_193":1827,"_195":1828},{"_158":1823,"_193":1824,"_195":1825},"gift-notification","

A silent gift confuses shoppers (\"what is this item in my cart?\"). Pair the claim mode with display surfaces in Step 2:

Auto-add → enable the Notification toast (\"You've unlocked free gifts!\").
Choice mode → the Pop-up is the picker itself; customize its title/subtitle.
Either → the announcement bar or product page widget before qualification, so the reward drives behavior before checkout.

","Tell the customer what just happened","works-in-reverse","

Enable Works in reverse (advanced settings) and the app removes gift items automatically when the customer no longer qualifies — e.g. they remove products and fall below the threshold.

We recommend keeping this on for every campaign. Without it, a shopper can qualify, receive the gift, empty the rest of the cart, and check out with only the free item.

","Works in reverse — keep carts honest","claim-modes","

Mode	What the customer experiences	Use when
Automatically add products to cart	The moment they qualify, all gift items appear in the cart at the discounted price, with a notification toast.	The gift has no variants (one tote bag, one sample sachet). Zero friction.
Give customers a choice of products to add	A \"Congratulations!\" pop-up opens on the cart page and they pick their gift — including the variant (size, color).	Gifts with variants, or when choosing between several gifts is part of the fun.

In choice mode you can also limit the total gifts added — e.g. the customer qualifies for 3 gift options but may add only 1.

","The two claim modes","c9174c78213cfc119c39aeec3","scheduling-priority-combinations","Scheduling, Priority & Combinations","Run campaigns on autopilot and control what happens when several offers overlap.",[1839,1840,1841],[1838,1648],"eligibility-and-targeting",{"_158":1847,"_193":1848,"_195":1849},{"_158":1844,"_193":1845,"_195":1846},{"_158":1545,"_193":1842,"_195":1843},"

The app's automatic discount is configured to combine with product, order, and shipping discounts — customers can apply your regular discount codes and still receive their gift. If a particular promo shouldn't stack (e.g. gift + 30%-off sitewide sale is too generous), schedule the campaigns so they don't overlap, or use Stop on Match between your own campaigns.

","Combining with discount codes","priority","

Under Works with other offers, two controls decide the outcome:

Priority — a number; lower runs first. Give your most important offer priority 1.
Stop on Match — \"Apply this campaign only and skip others if matched.\" When the campaign fires, no lower-priority campaign runs.

Example: a site-wide reward bar (priority 10) plus an exclusive VIP gift (priority 1, Stop on Match). VIPs get only their special offer; everyone else gets the reward bar.

","When several campaigns match the same cart","scheduling","

Every campaign has a start date and time, and optionally an end date and time (\"Set end date and time\"). Campaigns switch themselves on and off — schedule your Black Friday offer on Tuesday, and it starts and ends exactly on time. The editor validates the dates (end can't be before start).

","Scheduling","c2159d2acae36a7ffbbb2a32f","Eligibility Rules & Customer Targeting","Every sub-condition explained, with example setups for the common scenarios.",[1855,1856,1857],[1833,1819],{"_158":342,"_193":1864,"_195":1865},{"_158":1861,"_193":1862,"_195":1863},{"_158":1858,"_193":1859,"_195":1860},"use-cases","

Welcome gift: New customer + cart value ≥ $50 → free sample. Converts first-timers without giving margin to regulars.
VIP reward: Customer tags contains vip → gift at any spend. Pair with a Shopify segment that auto-tags your best customers.
Email-exclusive: Specific link address → share the link only in your newsletter; visitors from anywhere else don't see the offer.
Geo promo: Customer location = your domestic market → free-shipping milestone (international shipping costs stay protected).

When testing targeted campaigns yourself, remember you're usually a logged-in, returning customer — use an incognito window to see what a new visitor sees.

","Ready-made recipes","sub-conditions","

Then click Add sub condition to narrow the audience. Available conditions:

Condition	What it checks
New customer	First-time vs. returning buyers.
Customer's order history	Total spent overall, spent on the last order, or number of orders placed. Also lets you limit the number of uses per customer.
Customer location	Selected countries — or exclude customers from selected locations.
Customer tags	Match Shopify customer tags; can exclude by tag, and treat logged-out visitors as having no tags.
Customer's status	Logged in / logged out.
Product price	Only items above/below a price qualify.
Subscription products	Only subscription or only one-time purchases.
Specific link address	The offer activates only for visitors arriving via a special shareable link (e.g. `?summersale2024`) that the editor generates for you.
Markets	Selected Shopify Markets.

","Sub-conditions — who gets the offer","

First, decide what the qualifying purchase applies to: All products, Collections, Product tags, or Specific products. This controls which items move the customer toward the reward.

","Which products count","c9ec0f3653ca3e10110d433f3","reward-bar-milestones","Reward Bar & Milestone Tiers","Build a tiered reward ladder with a live progress bar — full setup with an example.",[1873,1874,1875],"Jul 13, 2026",[1737,1690],{"_158":1882,"_193":1883,"_195":1884},{"_158":1879,"_193":1880,"_195":1881},{"_158":1876,"_193":1877,"_195":1878},"display-setting","

1. Show on Included Page

Choose where the reward widget will be displayed on your store.

Show the reward widget on cart

Enable this option to display the reward widget on the cart page or cart drawer.

Show the reward widget on product pages

Enable this option to display the reward widget on product pages. Then, use the Display on dropdown to choose which product pages should show the widget:

- All product pages – Display the widget on every product page.

- Product specific page – Display the widget only on selected product pages.

- Products included in the offer – Display the widget only on product pages for products included in the campaign.

- All products in specific collections – Display the widget on product pages for products belonging to selected collections.

2. Milestone reward

Enable this option to show customers a text indicating how much more they need to spend to unlock the next milestone.

Customize the progress message displayed before reaching each milestone.

Use the {{amount}} variable to automatically display the remaining amount customers need to spend.

Customize the message shown when customers have unlocked all available milestones.

3. Offer claim behavior

Mode	What the customer experiences	Use when
Automatically add products to cart	The moment they qualify, all gift items appear in the cart at the discounted price, with a notification toast.	The gift has no variants (one tote bag, one sample sachet). Zero friction.
Give customers a choice of products to add	A \"Congratulations!\" pop-up opens on the cart page and they pick their gift — including the variant (size, color).	Gifts with variants, or when choosing between several gifts is part of the fun.

In choice mode you can also limit the total gifts added — e.g. the customer qualifies for 3 gift options but may add only 1.

","Display setting","campaign-setting","

Creating a gift offer consists of 5 fundamental parts:

Basic information
Customer buys (main condition, sub-condition)
Customer gets
Works with other offers
Advanced settings (optional)

1. Basic information

1.1. Offer title

The offer name is for internal management only and won’t be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date/End date

Start time: The time that the offer starts working.
End time (optional): The time that the offer stops working.

2. Customer buys

2.1. Select the products that will trigger the offer
First, decide what the qualifying purchase applies to: All products, Collections, Product tags, or Specific products. This controls which items move the customer toward the reward.

All products: All products in cart will be counted toward the cart quantity/cart value condition.
Collections: Only products in the selected collections will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Product tags: Only products with the chosen tags will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Specific products: Only products selected will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.

2.2. Sub conditions

Sub-conditions are optional to set up. Sub conditions can be combined together to target more specific customers.

Condition	What it checks
New customer	First-time vs. returning buyers.
Customer's order history	Total spent overall, spent on the last order, or number of orders placed. Also lets you limit the number of uses per customer.
Customer location	Selected countries — or exclude customers from selected locations.
Customer tags	Match Shopify customer tags; can exclude by tag, and treat logged-out visitors as having no tags.
Customer's status	Logged in / logged out.
Product price	Only items above/below a price qualify.
Subscription products	Only subscription or only one-time purchases.
Specific link address	The offer activates only for visitors arriving via a special shareable link (e.g. `?summersale2024`) that the editor generates for you.
Markets	Selected Shopify Markets.

Note: Some sub-conditions rely on Shopify customer data and can only be evaluated when the customer is logged in. These sub conditions include New customer, Customer's order history, Customer tags.

If the customer is not logged in, these conditions may not be applied.

3. Customer gets

3.1. Gift method:

Multi-goal: a ladder of milestones including more than 1 reward, maximum 4 reward tiers. Tiers could be Free gift, Order discount or Free shipping.
Single goal: one reward only and specifically used for Free gift offer.

Then pick how progress is measured: Total cart value or Product quantity.

3.2. Milestones
Click the button \"Add milestone\" to create a new tier. In each milestone, input a milestone name for internal management and set the minimum cart value required for customers to unlock the milestone in the \"Buy at least\" field. Each tier must be greater than the previous.

Free shipping milestone

No additional configuration is required.

Customers automatically receive free shipping once their cart reaches the minimum value set for this milestone.

Order discount milestone

- Discount name: Enter the name of the discount. This name may be displayed to customers as a discount tag in the cart, checkout page and in the order details, helping customers identify the promotion.

- Choose how the discount is calculated and input the value:

Percentage – Deduct a percentage from the order total.

Fixed Amount – Deduct a fixed monetary amount from the order total.

Free gift milestone.

Select the product(s) customers will receive when they reach this milestone.

Click Browse to choose one or more gift products.

4. Works with other offers

Under Works with other offers, two controls decide the outcome:

Priority — a number. Assign a priority level to this offer to determine the order in which offers are applied. A lower number indicates a higher priority (for example, 1 takes precedence over 2 or 3). This setting is used when a customer qualifies for multiple offers at the same time. Give your most important offer priority 1.
Stop on Match — \"Apply this campaign only and skip others if matched.\" When the campaign fires, no lower-priority campaign runs.

Example:
Campaign A (Priority 1): Buy $500 get free gift A

Campaign B (Priority 2): Buy 3 products get free gift B

Stop on Match is true -> If customer achieve $500 cart value, they will receive free gift A no matter whether they have more or less than 3 products in cart.

5. Advance settings

What happens when a customer passes several tiers? Choose the distribution rules below:

All eligible gifts — they receive every reward they've qualified for (at $120: free shipping + lip balm + 10% off). Generous, maximally motivating.
Nearest milestone gift only — only the highest tier reached (at $120: just the 10% off). Protects margin.

","Campaign setting","what-is-the-reward-bar","

The reward bar shows shoppers a live progress bar toward your reward tiers — for example \"Spend $20 more to unlock free shipping!\" — in the cart and/or on product pages. Because the next reward is always visible, it's the single strongest AOV lever in the app.

Reward types include: Free shipping, Free gift and Order discount.

","What is the reward bar?","c4508924cf776705d47811824","bxgy-and-bogo","Buy X Get Y & BOGO","Product-triggered rewards: setup, the multiply formula, and practical examples.",[1891,1892,1893],[1819,1648],{"_158":1896,"_193":1897,"_195":1898},{"_158":1879,"_193":1895,"_195":1881},{"_158":1876,"_193":1894,"_195":1878},"

1. Offer claim behavior

Mode	What the customer experiences	Use when
Automatically add products to cart	The moment they qualify, all gift items appear in the cart at the discounted price, with a notification toast.	The gift has no variants (one tote bag, one sample sachet). Zero friction.
Give customers a choice of products to add	A \"Congratulations!\" pop-up opens on the cart page and they pick their gift — including the variant (size, color).	Gifts with variants, or when choosing between several gifts is part of the fun.

In choice mode you can also limit the total gifts added — e.g. the customer qualifies for 3 gift options but may add only 1.

2. Offer exposure

2.1. Announcement bar
Show a store-wide banner promoting the offer. Configure the following:

Where: every page, home, product, or cart pages; device — desktop & mobile, only desktop, or only mobile.
Type: simple bar, whole bar clickable, or bar with a link/button (set the URL, button label, button-vs-link style, open in new tab).
Position: top or bottom of the screen; sticky or scrolls away; optional close icon.
Countdown timer: fixed duration in minutes (restarts per visitor) or a specific end date. When it runs out choose: Restart, Hide announcement bar, Show custom title (e.g. \"Offer ended — see what's next\"), or Do nothing.

2.2. Product page widget

Show a banner on the product page and promote your offers. Set up a title and a subtitle to indicate what the offer is and how much left customers need to spend to get the gift dynamically.

2.3. Promotion badge

Catch shopper's attention with special offer badges on product images. You can edit the badge content and choose whether the badge is displayed on every page or a specific page (homepage, product page, collection page).

","

Creating a BXGY/BOGO offer consists of 5 fundamental parts:

Basic information
Customer buys (main condition, sub-condition)
Customer gets
Works with other offers
Advanced settings (optional)

1. Basic information

1.1. Offer title

The offer name is for internal management only and won’t be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date/End date

Start time: The time that the offer starts working.
End time (optional): The time that the offer stops working.

2. Customer buys

2.1. Select the products that will trigger the offer

This controls which items move the customer toward the reward.

Each product quantity and variant can be adjusted according to your preferred conditions.

2.2. Add sub-conditions

Sub-conditions are optional to set up. Sub conditions can be combined together to target more specific customers.

Condition	What it checks
New customer	First-time vs. returning buyers.
Customer's order history	Total spent overall, spent on the last order, or number of orders placed. Also lets you limit the number of uses per customer.
Customer location	Selected countries — or exclude customers from selected locations.
Customer tags	Match Shopify customer tags; can exclude by tag, and treat logged-out visitors as having no tags.
Customer's status	Logged in / logged out.
Product price	Only items above/below a price qualify.
Subscription products	Only subscription or only one-time purchases.
Specific link address	The offer activates only for visitors arriving via a special shareable link (e.g. `?summersale2024`) that the editor generates for you.
Markets	Selected Shopify Markets.

If the customer is not logged in, these conditions may not be applied.

3. Customer gets

For BXGY Campaign:

Select the gifts you would like to offer as well as the quantity and discounts for them.

You can select multiple products to offer as gifts in this section and set up the quantity limit for each variant.

For BOGO campaign:

Gifts automatically configured to be the exact same products with the products chosen in the \"Customer buys\" section. The quantity of the gifts can be adjusted.

Please note: Specifically for BOGO campaign, if you select multiple products in the \"Customer buys\" section -> Each selected product is evaluated individually, not as a combined requirement.

This means customers do not need to purchase every selected product to receive the corresponding gift.

Example

If you select:

Customer Buys: Product A, Product B
Customer Gets: Product A, Product B

Then:

Customer buys Product A → Receives the gift for Product A.
Customer buys Product B → Receives the gift for Product B.
Customer buys both Product A and Product B → Receives both gifts.

In other words, each qualifying product triggers its corresponding gift independently.

In the \"Config discount\", give your discount a name. This name is displayed as a discount tag when your discount is applied to a product in cart.

After that, input the discount value. There are 2 discount types:

Percentage: The price of your gift will be discounted by a percentage of its original price. 100% means free gift.
Fixed: Set a fixed price for your gifts.

Ego Free Gift discount should work seamlessly with other Shopify discounts under the Shopify discount rules. It is configured to automatically combine with product, order, and shipping discounts If you have other Shopify discounts running, please make sure they are configured to be combinable.

4. Works with other offers

Under Works with other offers, two controls decide the outcome:

Priority — a number. Assign a priority level to this offer to determine the order in which offers are applied. A lower number indicates a higher priority (for example, 1 takes precedence over 2 or 3). This setting is used when a customer qualifies for multiple offers at the same time. Give your most important offer priority 1.
Stop on Match — \"Apply this campaign only and skip others if matched.\" When the campaign fires, no lower-priority campaign runs.

Example:
Campaign A (Priority 1): Buy $500 get free gift A

Campaign B (Priority 2): Buy 3 products get free gift B

Stop on Match is true -> If customer achieve $500 cart value, they will receive free gift A no matter whether they have more or less than 3 products in cart.

5. Advanced settings

Multiply formula: Enable this option to allow the gift quantity to increase as customers purchase more qualifying items.
When enabled, the Get (Y) quantity is multiplied based on how many times the customer meets the Buy (X) requirement.

Works in reverse: removes gift items automatically when the customer no longer qualifies — e.g. they remove products and fall below the threshold.
We recommend keeping this on for every campaign. Without it, a shopper can qualify, receive the gift, empty the rest of the cart, and check out with only the free item.

","what-is-bxgy-bogo-campaign","

A BXGY (Buy X Get Y) or BOGO (Buy One Get One) campaign rewards customers with a free or discounted product when they purchase specific qualifying products.

Unlike Cart Value or Cart Quantity campaigns, BXGY campaigns are based on which products customers buy, rather than the total cart value or number of items.

A BXGY/BOGO campaign has two parts:

Buy (X): The products customers must purchase to qualify.
Get (Y): The product(s) customers receive as the reward.

You can configure:

Which products or collections qualify as the Buy products.
Which products are offered as the Gift.
The required purchase quantity.
The gift quantity customers receive.

Example 1: Buy One Get One Free (BOGO)

Buy 1 T-Shirt
Get 1 T-Shirt for free

Example 2: Buy X Get Y

Buy 2 Coffee Bags
Get 1 Coffee Mug for free

Notes

For BOGO campaign, the gifts are automatically configured to be the exact same products with the products chosen to trigger the offer.

","What is BXGY/BOGO campaign?","cb8e080c151335fd9d41934b7","Cart Value & Quantity Gifts","Threshold gifts in detail: conditions, And/Or logic, and how the discount is applied.",[1904,1905,1906],[1648,1838],{"_158":1908,"_193":1909,"_195":1910},{"_158":1879,"_193":1907,"_195":1881},{"_158":1876,"_193":1894,"_195":1878},"

Creating a gift offer consists of 5 fundamental parts:

Basic information
Customer buys (main condition, sub-condition)
Customer gets
Works with other offers
Advanced settings (optional)

1. Basic information

1.1. Offer title

The offer name is for internal management only and won’t be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date/End date

Start time: The time that the offer starts working.
End time (optional): The time that the offer stops working.

2. Customer buys

All products: All products in cart will be counted toward the cart quantity/cart value condition.
Collections: Only products in the selected collections will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Product tags: Only products with the chosen tags will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Specific products: Only products selected will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.

2.2. Main conditions

Main condition lets you set the minimum cart value AND/OR minimum cart quantity customers must reach to qualify for your gift offer.
The cart value you enter is based on your store’s main currency (e.g., VND as shown in the image).

2.3. Sub conditions

Sub-conditions are optional to set up. Sub conditions can be combined together to target more specific customers.

Condition	What it checks
New customer	First-time vs. returning buyers.
Customer's order history	Total spent overall, spent on the last order, or number of orders placed. Also lets you limit the number of uses per customer.
Customer location	Selected countries — or exclude customers from selected locations.
Customer tags	Match Shopify customer tags; can exclude by tag, and treat logged-out visitors as having no tags.
Customer's status	Logged in / logged out.
Product price	Only items above/below a price qualify.
Subscription products	Only subscription or only one-time purchases.
Specific link address	The offer activates only for visitors arriving via a special shareable link (e.g. `?summersale2024`) that the editor generates for you.
Markets	Selected Shopify Markets.

If the customer is not logged in, these conditions may not be applied.

3. Customer gets

Select the gifts you would like to offer as well as the quantity and discounts for them.

You can select multiple products to offer as gifts in this section and set up the quantity limit for each variant.

In the \"Config discount\", give your discount a name. This name is displayed as a discount tag when your discount is applied to a product in cart.

After that, input the discount value. There are 2 discount types:

Percentage: The price of your gift will be discounted by a percentage of its original price. 100% means free gift.
Fixed: Set a fixed price for your gifts.

4. Works with other offers

Under Works with other offers, two controls decide the outcome:

Priority — a number. Assign a priority level to this offer to determine the order in which offers are applied. A lower number indicates a higher priority (for example, 1 takes precedence over 2 or 3). This setting is used when a customer qualifies for multiple offers at the same time. Give your most important offer priority 1.
Stop on Match — \"Apply this campaign only and skip others if matched.\" When the campaign fires, no lower-priority campaign runs.

Example:
Campaign A (Priority 1): Buy $500 get free gift A

Campaign B (Priority 2): Buy 3 products get free gift B

Stop on Match is true -> If customer achieve $500 cart value, they will receive free gift A no matter whether they have more or less than 3 products in cart.

5. Advanced settings

Enable Works in reverse (advanced settings) and the app removes gift items automatically when the customer no longer qualifies — e.g. they remove products and fall below the threshold.

We recommend keeping this on for every campaign. Without it, a shopper can qualify, receive the gift, empty the rest of the cart, and check out with only the free item.

","what-is-cart-value-cart-quantity-campaign","

A Cart Value/Cart Quantity Campaign rewards customers when their cart reaches a specific spending amount or product quantity.

You can choose one of two campaign types:

Cart Value

Customers qualify when their cart value reaches the minimum amount you set.

Example: Spend $100 or more → Get a free gift.

The cart value is calculated after Shopify product discounts are applied and before Shopify order discounts are applied (if available)

Cart Quantity

Customers qualify when the total number of items in their cart reaches the required quantity.

Example: Buy 3 items → Get a free gift.

The quantity is based on the total number of product units in the cart, not the number of unique products.

","What is Cart value/Cart quantity campaign?","cmrip5r4400z92umq5jxbowr0","gift-offer-subcondition","Gift Offer Sub-conditions","Sub conditions of every gift campaign",[1917,1918],[],{"_158":1922,"_193":1923,"_195":1924},{"_158":1919,"_193":1920,"_195":1921},"which-sub-conditions-require-customers-to-log-in","

Some sub-conditions in Ego Free Gift rely on Shopify customer data. For these conditions to work correctly, the customer must be logged in to their Shopify customer account so the app can identify them and access the required information.

Sub-Conditions That Require Login

Customer's Order History

Customers must be logged in when the campaign uses conditions based on their previous order history, such as: Total amount spent, Amount spent on the last order, Number of orders placed, Number of times the offer can be used per customer

Without login, the app cannot identify the customer and check their previous order data.

Customer Tags

Customers must be logged in for the app to check their Shopify customer tags.

For example, if an offer is available only to customers with a VIP tag, the customer needs to log in before the app can verify that they are eligible.

Note: Logged-out visitors are treated as having no customer tags. Therefore, an exclude by tag condition may still allow logged-out visitors to qualify.

What Happens If the Customer Is Not Logged In?

If a campaign uses a condition that requires customer identification, the app may not be able to confirm whether a logged-out visitor qualifies for the offer.

For the most accurate eligibility checks, we recommend informing customers that they need to log in before adding products to their cart when your campaign uses Customer's Order History or Customer Tags conditions.

","Which sub-conditions require customers to log in?","list-of-sub-conditions","

Sub-conditions are optional and can be combined to target more specific customer groups or purchase scenarios.

Condition	What it checks
New customer	Targets first-time or returning customers.
Customer's order history	Checks the customer's total spend, amount spent on their last order, or number of orders placed. You can also limit the number of times each customer can use the offer.
Customer location	Includes or excludes customers from selected countries.
Customer tags	Matches Shopify customer tags. You can include or exclude customers based on specific tags.
Customer's status	Targets customers based on whether they are logged in or logged out.
Product price	Only products above or below a specified price qualify.
Subscription products	Targets subscription purchases or one-time purchases.
Specific link address	Activates the offer only for visitors who access your store through a special shareable link generated in the campaign editor, such as `?summersale2024`.
Markets	Targets selected Shopify Markets.

","List of Sub-conditions","c28d2fd837902f94a6ebd7f7f","Create Your First Gift Campaign","A complete walkthrough: from choosing an offer type to seeing the gift in the cart.",[1931,1932,1933,1934],"Jul 6, 2026",[1819,1867,1647],{"_158":1944,"_193":1945,"_195":1946},{"_158":1941,"_193":1942,"_195":1943},{"_158":1938,"_193":1939,"_195":1940},{"_158":1935,"_193":1936,"_195":1937},"step-4-activate-and-test","

Make sure to click Save after the settings is done.

https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0690/4243/8282/files/Save_settings.png?v=1783311306

Then run a test on your storefront:

Add products that meet your offer conditions to the cart.
Check that your offer shows up and applies the correct discount or gift.
Check if all offer exposure shows up correctly (announcement bar, product page widget, promotion badge).
Remove items to get below the threshold — if you enabled Works in reverse, the gift disappears.

","Step 4 — Activate and test","step-3-display-setting","

Switch to Step 2: Display setting and turn on how shoppers learn about the offer.

You can set up whether customers will get a gift automatically added to cart, or they can select gifts from a popup.

There are other methods of displaying the offer:

Notification/Popup — the toast when the gift lands in the cart (\"You've unlocked free gifts!\").
Announcement bar — \"Spend {{trigger_value}} and get a FREE gift 🎁\" on every page.
Product page widget — the offer card on product pages (needs its theme block added once — the editor links you there).
Promotion badge — Catch shopper's attention with special offer badges on product images

https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0690/4243/8282/files/Screenshot_2.png?v=1783313323

","Step 3 — Display setting","step-2-campaign-setting","

Configure the following sections to create your promotion:

Basic Information – Enter the offer name, display title, schedule, and other general settings.
Customer buys – Define the requirements customers must meet to qualify for the offer, such as cart value, product quantity, specific products, collections, customer tags, and more.
Customer gets – Choose the reward customers will receive once the conditions are met, including free gifts, discounts, free shipping.

https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0690/4243/8282/files/Screenshot_1.png?v=1783313302

","Step 2 — Campaign setting","step-1-pick-the-offer-type","

Go to Campaign → Create campaign and choose an offer type that matches your goal. Five ready-made offer types appear: Cart value gift, Cart quantity gift, Reward bar, BXGY, BOGOS.

https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0690/4243/8282/files/Create_campaign.png?v=1783310337

","Step 1 — Pick the offer type","c7ed54ba6fcb6598d7fd31743","Installing & Activating Ego Free Gift","Install the app, enable the app embed, and get ready to run your first offer.",[1952,1953,1954,1955],[1718,1737,1647],{"_158":1962,"_193":1963,"_195":1964},{"_158":1960,"_193":1961,"_195":615},{"_158":1958,"_193":1959,"_195":612},{"_158":1956,"_193":1957,"_195":609},"step-3-finish-the-setup-guide","

The Dashboard side guide tracks three steps:

Activate App — done above.
Create your first campaign — see the next article for a full walkthrough.
Customize your widget — style the storefront widgets under Widgets to match your brand.

Dismiss the guide any time. If you get stuck at any step, the in-app live chat (\"Need some help to move faster?\") reaches our team directly.

","step-2-activate-the-app-embed","

The storefront experience is delivered by the Ego Free Gift theme app embed. While it's disabled, the Dashboard warns you: \"customers won't see or receive any gifts on your store.\"

On the Dashboard, click Activate app embed — the Theme Editor opens on the App embeds panel.
Toggle Ego Free Gift on.
Click Save.

Back on the Dashboard the banner should now read: \"App embed is currently enabled. Customers can see and receive gifts automatically based on your rules.\"

Publishing a new theme later? Re-enable the embed on that theme — it's per-theme.

","step-1-install-the-app","

Install Ego Free Gift from the Shopify App Store and approve the permissions. The app opens in your Shopify admin with two main sections — Campaign (your offers) and Widgets (how they look) — plus a Dashboard showing setup status and headline results.

","what-is-ego-free-gift","

Ego Free Gift raises your average order value with automatic rewards. The core loop:

You create a campaign — e.g. \"Spend $100 → get a free tote bag\" or \"Buy 2 → get 1 free\".
Shoppers see the offer on your storefront — an announcement bar, a progress bar toward the reward, a product-page card, or a badge.
When they qualify, the gift is added to the cart automatically (or they pick one from a pop-up), already discounted — no code to type.
You track Views, add-to-carts, conversion, and Revenue per campaign.

Beyond free gifts, the same app runs Upsell campaigns (cross-sells, frequently-bought-together, post-purchase offers) and Product Bundles.

","What is Ego Free Gift?","cart-art-how-can-i-test-the-cart-without-enabling-on-live-store","how-can-i-test-the-cart-without-enabling-on-live-store","How can I test the cart without enabling on Live Store?",[1972],"Oct 2, 2025",[],"Ego Cart Drawer",{"_158":543,"_193":1973,"_195":647},"

You can play around with the features of the cart without showing the cart on your live store, by enabling Ego in a draft theme.

Step 1:

Go to the Themes page in your Shopify admin. !

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Find your draft theme, then click the Customize button. !

$\"\"$

Step 3:

In the editor, click the App embeds icon (looks like a puzzle piece). !

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Find Ego Cart in the list and enable it. Hit Save. !

$\"\"$

Step 5:

Click Preview to check how the cart appears in your draft theme. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-why-cant-i-see-my-upsell-product-on-the-storefront","why-cant-i-see-my-upsell-product-on-the-storefront","Why can’t I see my Upsell product on the Storefront?",[1979,1980,1981],[],{"_158":1988,"_193":1989,"_195":1990},{"_158":1985,"_193":1986,"_195":1987},{"_158":1982,"_193":1983,"_195":1984},"online-store-sales-channel","

Ensure the product is available in the Online Store sales channel:

Go to your Shopify Admin → Products tab.
Select the product.
In the Publishing section (top right), look for a green dot next to Online Store. !

$\"\"$

f it’s not there:

Click the three-dot icon in that section.
Select Manage Sales Channels.
Add the product to Online Store.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Online Store Sales Channel","active-status-vs-draft-status","

Make sure the product is set to Active. If the product is marked as Draft, it will not display as an upsell.

You can verify this in the Products tab of your Shopify Admin.
Look at the Status column next to the product name.

$\"\"$

","Active Status VS. Draft Status","track-quantity","

If “Track quantity” is enabled, the product must have available inventory. Check the Available column in your Shopify Admin:

If the number is 0, the add-on won’t appear.
Shopify uses four different inventory states. You can learn more about them here. For single-variant products:
Scroll to the Inventory section to view stock levels.

$\"\"$

For multi-variant products:

Go to the Variants section.
Click on each variant to view its inventory settings. ---

","Track Quantity","cart-art-why-ego-cart-doesnt-open-when-i-click-atc","why-ego-cart-doesnt-open-when-i-click-atc","Why Ego cart doesn't open when I click ATC?",[1996],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1997,"_195":647},"

Have you encountered an issue where the Ego cart does not open when you click on the Add to cart button on your store's pages, even though it's activated? This can be frustrating and may prevent your customers from completing their purchases. In this article, we will explain why this may be happening and how you can resolve it.

What is causing this issue?

The most common reason for the Ego cart not opening is due to the add to cart event being overlapped or over-ridden by other applications or theme on your store. The add to cart event is what triggers the Ego cart to open, so if it is not functioning properly, the cart will not open as expected.

How can I resolve this issue?

If you are experiencing this issue, the best course of action is to contact our support team. Our team of experts will be able to identify the root cause of the problem and provide you with the optimal solution.

$\"\"$

In some cases, the issue may be related to a specific app or theme on your store. In this case, our support team may recommend disabling or removing the app or making changes to your theme's code to resolve the issue.

","cart-art-if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-be-charged","if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-be-charged","If I change from Paid plan to Free plan, will I be charged?",[2004],[],"Billing & Plans",{"_158":543,"_193":2005,"_195":647},"

If you switch from a Paid plan to the Free plan before your trial ends, you won’t be charged.

However, if you downgrade after the trial has ended but before the current subscription period ends, you will still be charged for the full billing period. Shopify will automatically refund the unused portion of the billing cycle if the app is not uninstalled.

If you have any questions regarding this matter, please reach out to our support team.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-what-plans-we-offer-and-the-differences-installed-since-332026","what-plans-we-offer-and-the-differences-installed-since-332026","What plans we offer and the differences? (Installed since 3/3/2026)",[2011,2012,2013],[],{"_158":2020,"_193":2021,"_195":2022},{"_158":2017,"_193":2018,"_195":2019},{"_158":2014,"_193":2015,"_195":2016},"explanation","

Multi cart: The Free plan and the Basic plan do not have the multi-cart feature, while Advanced plan allows up to 10 carts and Pro plan has a maximum of 50 different carts.
Announcement: You can only create a single announcement in Basic plan, while other paid plans can have multiple announcements (up to 5 announcements).
Multi-tier Progress Bar In the Free plan, the Rewards bar feature is not available. In paid plans, you can create up to 3 reward tiers, with 3 templates and confetti animation. If you only want the values of some specific products/collections to be counted in the Rewards bar, the feature is available in the Pro plan. The option to show rewards bar on empty cart is also only available in Pro plan.

$\"\"$

Basic Free Gift/Advanced Free Gift Free plan does not include the Free gift feature. In Basic and Advanced plan, the Basic Free Gift feature is available. This means that you can set up the free gift to be triggered by the minimum quantity of items in the cart or the minimum purchase amount. However, to unlock the option to trigger the free gift by buying specific products in the store (Advanced Free Gift), or selecting a specific variant of a product to be your free gift, you need to be in Pro plan.

$\"\"$

Upsell/Advance Upsell Upsell feature is not available in the Free plan. In the Basic plan, you can set up the Upsells by either AI recommended method or Manual method. With the Manual method, you can select the trigger of the upsells to be either \"All products\" or \"Specific products\".

$\"\"$

The locked features in the image above (Specific collection, Discounts, Advanced settings) are available in Advanced and Pro plan only, and you can also choose specific variants of the upsell in these 2 plans. In the Pro plan, you can show upsells when the cart is empty.

Basic Add-ons/Advanced Add-ons Free plan does not include the Add-ons feature. In Basic plan, you can set up the fixed price for your add-ons. However, to unlock the setting of Percentage Price, Tier Price, Auto-fulfill option and Add second Add-ons, you need to be in Advanced or Pro plan.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Explanation","plan-descriptions","

$\"\"$

For details, please check out the feature table in the Pricing page of the app.

$\"\"$

","Plan Descriptions","plans-and-pricing","

We have 4 plans for merchants to choose from: Free, Basic, Advanced and Pro.

Pricing

Plan	Pricing
Basic	$12.99/month ($29.99/month for Shopify Plus)
Advanced	$19.99/month ($39.99/month for Shopify Plus)
Pro	$39.99/month ($69.99/month for Shopify Plus)

Each paid plan has a free 7-day trial that can be cancelled anytime. You will only be charged when the 7th day is over.

","Plans and Pricing","cart-art-will-i-get-charged-after-uninstalling-the-app","will-i-get-charged-after-uninstalling-the-app","Will I get charged after uninstalling the app?",[2029],"Jun 22, 2026",[],{"_158":543,"_193":2030,"_195":647},"

If you uninstall the app within the 7-day trial, you won’t be charged. After the trial ends, you will still be charged for the full subscription period, even if you uninstall before it ends. If you have any questions regarding this matter, please reach out to our support team.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-how-to-cancel-subscriptions","how-to-cancel-subscriptions","How to cancel Subscriptions?",[2036,2037],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2041,"_195":647},{"_158":2038,"_193":2039,"_195":2040},"steps-by-steps-guide","

If you prefer to not use the above link, please follow the steps below to uninstall instead:

Click on the \"Ego Cart Upsell\" app on the Apps menu of your Shopify Admin.
Select the \"Pricing\" tab on the left side of the screen.
Click select under FREE block - confirm the plan, then it's all done. You will be free of charge from now on.

| Please change the app plan to FREE before uninstalling the app to get rid of over-charged.

Rest assured that Ego doesn't leave any code behind on your store when uninstalled since it is enabled through an app embed.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps by steps guide:","

If you're running into any issues with how Ego is working, please feel free to reach out to us in the chat on the bottom right of the app. We're always happy to help troubleshoot and we always appreciate feedback.

If you're still set on parting ways with us though, all you need to do is change to FREE plan in our Pricing tab; changing app plan to FREE will automatically cancel your subscription to Ego. !

$\"\"$

","cart-art-when-will-i-get-charged-after-the-trial-ends","when-will-i-get-charged-after-the-trial-ends","When will I get charged after the trial ends?",[2047],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2048,"_195":647},"

The Trial period lasts for 7 days (Basic, Advanced, and Pro plan) from the moment you install Ego Cart Upsell Cart Drawer. The subscription will be automatically added to Shopify billing cycle and billed right after the trial ends according to Shopify subscription charges.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-is-it-easy-to-switch-between-plans","is-it-easy-to-switch-between-plans","Is it easy to switch between plans?",[2054],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2055,"_195":647},"

Yes, it is really easy to switch plans. To switch between plans, go to the Pricing page and select your desired plan.

$\"\"$

You will then be directed to your Shopify admin to approve the subscription. If you have unused days from your previous plan, Shopify refunds you automatically in the form of Shopify credits.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-lose-the-features-or-effects-that-","if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-lose-the-features-or-effects-that-were-available-in-the-previous-plan","If I change from Paid plan to Free plan, will I lose the features or effects that were available in the previous plan?",[2061],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2062,"_195":647},"

Upon downgrading, all data regarding your setup remains. However, there are a few points you should consider:

We will select list of carts based on the number of carts available on your plan (Default cart will stay)
You can still edit the features available in your previous plan but they can not be active unless you upgrade your plan again --- Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-what-plans-we-offer-and-the-differences","what-plans-we-offer-and-the-differences","What plans we offer and the differences?",[2069,2070,2071],"May 21, 2026",[],{"_158":2020,"_193":2074,"_195":2022},{"_158":2017,"_193":2073,"_195":2019},{"_158":2014,"_193":2072,"_195":2016},"

Multi cart: Free plan and the Basic plan do not have the multi-cart feature, while Advanced plan allows up to 10 carts and Pro plan has a maximum of 50 different carts.
Announcement: You can only create a single announcement in Basic plan, while other paid plans can have multiple announcements (up to 5 announcements).
Single Tier Progress Bar/Multi-tier Progress Bar In Free plan, you can only create 1 tier with the Rewards Bar feature. Some of the settings are locked, specifically selecting templates for rewards bar and show rewards on empty cart, and adding animation. In paid plans, you can create up to 3 reward tiers, with 3 templates. Confetti animation is available in Basic plan. The option to show rewards bar on empty cart is only available in Pro plan. !

$\"\"$

f you only want the values of some specific products/collections to be counted in the Rewards bar, the feature is available in the Pro plan. !

$\"\"$

Basic Free Gift/Advanced Free Gift Free plan does not include the Free gift feature. In Basic and Advanced plan, the Basic Free Gift feature is available. This means that you can set up the free gift to be triggered by the minimum quantity of items in the cart or the minimum purchase amount. However, to unlock the option to trigger the free gift by buying specific products in the store (Advanced Free Gift), or selecting a specific variant of a product to be your free gift, you need to be in Pro plan. !

$\"\"$

Basic Upsell/Rules Based Upsell In Free plan, you can only create up to 10 upsell offers, while paid plans allow up to 50 upsell offers. In Free plan and Basic plan, there are no advanced upsell conditions and upsell discounts. !

$\"\"$

ee locked features in the image above (Specific collection, Discounts, Advanced settings) are available in Advanced and Pro plan only, and you can also choose specific variants of the upsell in these 2 plans. In the Pro plan, you can show upsells when the cart is empty.

Basic Add-ons/Advanced Add-ons Free plan does not include the Add-ons feature. In Basic plan, you can set up the fixed price for your add-ons. However, to unlock the setting of Percentage Price, Tier Price, Auto-fulfill option and Add second Add-ons, you need to be in Advanced or Pro plan.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","

$\"\"$

For details, please check out the feature table in the Pricing page of the app.

$\"\"$

","

We have 4 plans for merchants to choose from: Free, Basic, Advanced and Pro.

Pricing

Plan	Pricing
Basic	$12.99/month ($29.99/month for Shopify Plus)
Advanced	$19.99/month ($39.99/month for Shopify Plus)
Pro	$39.99/month ($69.99/month for Shopify Plus)

Each paid plan has a free 14-day trial that can be cancelled anytime. You will only be charged when the 14th day is over.

","cart-art-can-i-cancel-my-subscription-at-anytime","can-i-cancel-my-subscription-at-anytime","Can I cancel my subscription at anytime?",[2080,2081],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2085,"_195":647},{"_158":2082,"_193":2083,"_195":2084},"how-to-cancel-subscription","

Step 1: Access the Pricing page from the app menu's bar

$\"\"$

Step 2: Click Active in Free plan to downgrade your plan

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","How to cancel subscription","

Absolutely! At Ego, we prioritize flexibility and control over your subscription. You can cancel anytime without hassle. Plus, the first 14 days of a paid subscription are completely free. If you decide to cancel within this period, you won’t be charged.

","cart-art-app-billing-cycle","app-billing-cycle","App billing cycle",[2091,2092,2093,2094,2095],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2108,"_195":647},{"_158":2105,"_193":2106,"_195":2107},{"_158":2102,"_193":2103,"_195":2104},{"_158":2099,"_193":2100,"_195":2101},{"_158":2096,"_193":2097,"_195":2098},"where-to-see-app-charges","

You can review all app charges directly in your Shopify Admin:

Go to Settings > Billing.
View your current and past invoices.
App charges are listed as line items under App Charges or App Usage Charges. For more detailed information, Shopify provides an official breakdown here: Shopify Help Center – App Charges ---

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Where to See App Charges","billing-timeline-example","

Let’s say you install an app on May 20 and approve a $12.99/month recurring charge:

Your first app billing cycle is May 20 – Jun 19.
You’ll be charged $12.99 on your next Shopify invoice, even if your main Shopify subscription renews on a different date.
On Jun 19, the next $12.99 will be billed, starting a new 30-day app billing cycle. Please note: App billing cycles and your Shopify billing cycle may not always align. This means charges can occasionally appear larger than expected, especially if Shopify combines multiple app billing periods (e.g., two months of charges) into a single invoice.

$\"\"$

","Billing Timeline Example","types-of-app-charges","

There are three main types of charges you may see from an app:

Recurring Application Charges (most common)

A flat monthly fee — for example, $12.99/month for Ego Basic plan.
Billed every 30 days starting from the approval date.
Automatically renews unless canceled.

Usage Charges

Based on how much you use the app (e.g., based on orders, views, or other metrics).
These are added to your invoice within your Shopify billing cycle.

One-Time Charges

A single charge, typically for a special feature, upgrade, or add-on.
Billed once and not repeated unless explicitly triggered again. ---

","Types of App Charges","what-is-an-app-billing-cycle","

An app billing cycle is the interval at which you are charged for using a third-party app on your Shopify store. Shopify manages billing for most apps (including Ego), so your app charges are added directly to your Shopify invoice.

Key Points:

App billing cycles do not necessarily match your Shopify subscription billing cycle.
Each app you install may have its own billing cycle, which usually starts on the day you approve the app charge.
Charges are typically recurring monthly, but apps can also use usage-based or one-time charges. ---

","What is an App Billing Cycle?","

When using apps through Shopify, including Ego, it's important to understand how app billing cycles work so you can manage your charges and subscriptions effectively. This guide will walk you through how Shopify handles billing for third-party apps, what to expect on your invoice, and how billing cycles relate to your Shopify subscription.

","cart-art-will-i-get-charged-more-when-i-change-the-plan","will-i-get-charged-more-when-i-change-the-plan","Will I get charged more when I change the plan?","We understand that your needs may change over time. Here’s what to expect when you upgrade or downgrade your subscription plan.",[2115,2116,2117,2118],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2128,"_195":647},{"_158":2125,"_193":2126,"_195":2127},{"_158":2122,"_193":2123,"_195":2124},{"_158":2119,"_193":2120,"_195":2121},"ii-downgrade-plan","

When downgrading, Shopify will show a confirmation message. After confirming, you will lose access to features exclusive to the higher-tier plan.

When switching to a lower monthly plan, Shopify will automatically apply a credit for the unused portion of your current plan.

Proration Formula:

Credit = (current_plan_cost - new_plan_cost) × (remaining_days / 30)

Example:

You're on the Premium Plan ($39.99/month) and downgrade to the Advance Plan ($19.99/month) on Day 15.

Calculation:

($39.99 - $19.99) × (15/30) = $10.00

You’ll receive a $10.00 credit, automatically applied to your next app charge.

🔍 To check your credits: Go to Shopify Admin → Settings → Billing → Credits *More info: Shopify – Manage Billing

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","II. Downgrade Plan","i-upgrade-plan","

When you upgrade to a higher plan, Shopify will ask you to approve the new charge. Learn more about how Shopify handles app charges here.

Once approved:

You’ll immediately unlock all features of the new plan.
All your existing data will remain intact.
Your current recurring charge will be canceled and replaced with the new one. 💡 If you upgrade mid-cycle, a prorated charge will apply based on the remaining days in your billing cycle.

Proration Formula:

Total = current_plan_cost + (new_plan_cost - current_plan_cost) × (remaining_days / 30)

Example:

You're on the Advance Plan ($19.99).
On Day 15 of the cycle, you upgrade to the Premium Plan ($39.99).

Calculation:

$19.99 + ($39.99 - $19.99) × (15/30) = $19.99 + $10.00 = $29.99

Your invoice will reflect two charges:

$19.99 for the Advance Plan
$10.00 for the upgrade If you upgrade on the same day your billing cycle starts, you’ll simply be charged the full price of the new plan (e.g., $39.99 for Premium). ---

","I. Upgrade Plan","table-of-contents","

I. Upgrade Plan

II. Downgrade Plan

📌 Note: Ego uses Shopify’s billing system, but operates on its own 30-day billing cycle, which may not align exactly with Shopify's invoice cycle. Most app charges will appear on your next Shopify invoice.

For more, see Shopify’s Billing Help Article.

","Table of Contents","

We understand that your needs may change over time. Here’s what to expect when you upgrade or downgrade your subscription plan.

","cart-art-ego-pricing-policy-installed-in-april-2026","ego-cart-pricing","Ego Cart Upsell Pricing","Ego Cart Drawer Pricing Policy",[2135,2136],[],{"_158":2140,"_193":2141,"_195":2142},{"_158":2137,"_193":2138,"_195":2139},"faq","

When does billing start?

Billing starts on day 8, after your 7-day free trial ends. This is also when Ego begins counting eligible orders.

Does Ego count orders during the free trial?

No, orders are not counted during the 7-day free trial. Counting begins only after the trial ends.

Can I use the app without subscribing?

Yes, you can open the app and set up features without subscribing. However, you will not be able to change your cart status to Active until you activate your subscription.

What happens if I move into a higher tier?

As soon as your eligible order volume reaches a higher tier, Ego automatically creates the corresponding additional charge. That charge will then appear on your Shopify invoice.

What happens if I cancel in the middle of the billing cycle?

Your cart will be moved to Draft, Ego will stop being active on your store, and order counting will stop from that point forward. Unused order quota from the tier you already paid for is not refunded.

Do all paid subscribers get access to all features?

Yes, all features are unlocked once you subscribe.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","FAQ","ego-pricing-billing","

This article explains how Ego pricing works, how orders are counted, when charges begin, and what happens if you cancel your subscription.

Pricing Overview

Ego uses a usage-based pricing model based on your store’s monthly order volume while Ego is active.

Your total charge is made up of: Total charge = Base fee + Usage fee

Base fee: $14.99/month
Usage fee: depends on the number of eligible orders generated through your Shopify Online Store during your billing cycle

Monthly order volume	Base fee	Usage fee	Total charge
0-20 orders	FREE	$0.00	FREE
21-200 orders	$14.99	$0.00	$14.99/month
201-500 orders	$14.99	$10.00	$24.99/month
501-1000 orders	$14.99	$25.00	$39.99/month
1001+ orders	$14.99	$55.00	$69.99/month

Free trial

Ego includes a 7-day free trial.

You will not be charged during the free trial.
Order counting does not begin during the free trial.
Billing and order counting both begin on day 8.

How billing works

After ended the trial, when you subscribe to Ego:

You are not charged for the first 20 orders.
From order number 21, you will be charged the base fee of $14.99.
If your store reaches a higher usage tier during the billing cycle, an additional charge is created immediately when that tier is reached.
These charges will appear on your Shopify invoice, based on Shopify’s monthly billing process.

How orders are counted

An order is counted toward Ego usage when all of the following are true:

The order is created through your store’s Shopify Online Store channel
Your 7-day free trial has ended
You have the subscription plan active

Billing cycle

Ego usage is measured within your 30-day billing cycle. Your order count resets at the start of each new billing cycle.

","Ego Pricing & Billing","cart-art-how-to-set-up-an-add-on-products-current-version-installed-since-24022025","how-to-set-up-an-add-on-products-current-version-installed-since-24022025","How to set up an add-on products? (Current version - Installed since 24/02/2025)","Shipping Protection and Gift Wrapping with a single touch",[2151,2152,2153,2154],"Oct 1, 2025",[],"Features & Setup",{"_158":543,"_193":2164,"_195":647},{"_158":2161,"_193":2162,"_195":2163},{"_158":2158,"_193":2159,"_195":2160},{"_158":2155,"_193":2156,"_195":2157},"steps-to-set-up-an-add-on-product","

Step 1:

Access Add-ons Feature

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab. This will open the Cart List page. Click on the cart you want to edit to begin making changes.

$\"\"$

Select Add-ons module in the feature menu. Click Enable to turn on the feature.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Configure Add-on Product

Once enabled, an add-on product (Shipping Protection) will be automatically created. You can customize the product's title, description, and image as needed.

$\"\"$

Next, set up the price. There are three pricing methods available. Learn more here.
If you want to add the second add-on product, click Add Second Addons button.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Check how your add-on works on the storefront

Add items to cart to open cart.
Check if add-on appears in the cart.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up an add-on product","common-used-cases","

Example: Merchants want to offer Shipping Protection as an add-on for $5.

$\"\"$

","Common used cases","what-is-add-ons","

Add-ons is a feature that displays special services or products offered by merchants—such as shipping protection, gift wrapping, and more—directly in the cart.

","What is Add-ons?","

Shipping Protection and Gift Wrapping with a single touch

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-upsells-current-version-installed-since-24022025","how-to-set-up-upsells-current-version-installed-since-24022025","How to set up Upsells? (Current version - Installed since 24/02/2025)","Add in-cart upselling and cross-selling product block.",[2172,2173,2174,2175,2176,2177],"Sep 30, 2025",[],{"_158":2190,"_193":2191,"_195":2192},{"_158":2158,"_193":2189,"_195":2160},{"_158":2186,"_193":2187,"_195":2188},{"_158":513,"_193":2184,"_195":2185},{"_158":2181,"_193":2182,"_195":2183},{"_158":2178,"_193":2179,"_195":2180},"step-3","

Select \"Use AI recommended upsells\" method, which uses Shopify’s algorithm to suggest products with similar attributes. The data is taken from Shopify Search & Discovery app. !

$\"\"$

Related: Default setting of this upsell method, and uses the auto-selected mechanism of Shopify.
Complementary: Similar to related products but is displayed differently on the product page. This requires manual setup in Shopify Search & Discovery. How to configure within Shopify Search & Discovery App.

Step 4:

Edit the upsell title and the upsell product background color. !

$\"\"$

Other settings are:

Always show even the upsell product is in cart: The upsell product is still visible in the upsell block even if the same product is already in the cart.
Limit the number of upsell in cart: Use this when you want to limit the upsell products showing to customers at one time. !

$\"\"$

Step 5:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 6:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Step 3:","feature-settings-steps-to-set-up-an-automatic-upsells-offer","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Upsells module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Select the template for how the upsell products show in the cart.

$\"\"$

There are 4 templates available: Default, Compacted, Slider and Stacked.

","Feature Settings: Steps to set up an automatic Upsells offer","

In Manual method, there will be some advanced settings to show the upsells. For example, show this upsell if any/all of the following match: the cart value/cart quantity is equal to/not equal to/greater than/less than/..., or show upsells to specific countries.

$\"\"$

Other settings are:

Always show even the upsell product is in cart: The upsell product is still visible in the upsell block even if the same product is already in the cart.
Limit the number of upsell in cart: Use this when you want to limit the upsell products showing to customers at one time. !

$\"\"$

","Advanced Settings","feature-settings-steps-to-set-up-a-manual-upsells-offer","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Upsells module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Select the template for how the upsell products show in the cart.

$\"\"$

There are 4 templates available: Default, Compacted, Slider and Stacked.

Step 3:

Select the manual method and click \"Create Upsells\" to add an upsell module. !

$\"\"$

The conditions to trigger upsell products can be All products, Specific products, Specific collections or Empty cart. Upsell products can only be searched for and configured one by one by selecting from the product list.

$\"\"$

After that, set up the discount for the upsells if you want to. This feature will automatically generate a discount itself, it is not necessary to create a equivalent Shopify discount.

If you have multiple upsell offers and a product may be the trigger of different upsell offers, the top offer (or the closest to the top) will be prioritized.

Step 4:

Edit the upsell title and the upsell product background color.

$\"\"$

Step 5:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 6:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

","Feature Settings: Steps to set up a manual Upsells offer","

Example 1: Merchants want to encourage customers to buy more similar products for a discounted price.

$\"\"$

Example 2: Merchants want to promote a combo with better price compared to the main product.

$\"\"$

There are 2 ways to set up an Upsell offer: Automatically through AI recommended upsells or Manual method.

","what-is-upsells","

Upsells is a block within the cart drawer that displays one or multiple complementary/related products of the added main products. Merchants can use this to encourage customers to purchase a more expensive item, add-ons, or upgrades to enhance their original purchase.

Customers can add these items to their cart with just a few clicks, increasing the chances of additional sales.

","What is Upsells?","cart-art-how-to-set-up-discount-box","how-to-set-up-discount-box","How to set up Discount Box?","Text field which allows customers to apply discount codes within the cart.",[2199,2200,2201],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2208,"_195":647},{"_158":2205,"_193":2206,"_195":2207},{"_158":2202,"_193":2203,"_195":2204},"steps-to-set-up-the-discount-box","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Discount Box module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Edit the content for the Discount Box.

Discount Placeholder Text: A blurred text used to guide customers on how to input in this field, this text will be removed once the code is filled in. Default text is: Discount code.
Button Text: A clickable text to officially apply the discount to the order after filling in the code. Default text is: Apply.

$\"\"$

| While multiple automatic discounts can be applied simultaneously, only one manual discount code is allowed in the cart drawer. To apply multiple manual discount codes, customers must proceed to checkout.

| Free shipping discount code is not allowed in the cart drawer. Customers must complete this action at checkout.

Step 3:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up the Discount Box","what-is-discount-box","

Discount box is a field in which customers can type in the discount code. Instead of applying discount code in the checkout page, this field allows customers to use their code directly in the cart drawer, showing how the discount affects the order, hence making easier purchase decisions.

$\"\"$

","What is Discount Box?","

Text field which allows customers to apply discount codes within the cart.

","cart-art-how-to-customize-the-cart-font","how-to-customize-the-cart-font","How to customize the cart font?",[2214,2215],[],{"_158":2219,"_193":2220,"_195":2221},{"_158":2216,"_193":2217,"_195":2218},"old-version-installed-before-24-02-2025","

In some cases, merchants may want to change the cart font to better match their theme or use a custom font.

To change the font in the cart, simply use the following CSS code:

section#cart-drawer-container {

font-family: your-font-name !important; } Replace your-font-name with the exact name of the font you want to use.

Example:

section#cart-drawer-container { font-family: Montserrat !important; }

Paste this code into the Custom CSS section in your Cart Editor Settings. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Old version - Installed before 24/02/2025","current-version-installed-after-24-02-2025","

To make the cart font match your theme’s font, go to Settings and enable the option ***Apply Theme Fonts*.**

$\"\"$

To use a custom font in your cart, apply the following CSS code:

#cart-drawer-container {

font-family: your-font-name !important; }

Replace your-font-name with the exact name of the font you want to use.

Example: #cart-drawer-container { font-family: Montserrat !important; }

Paste this code into the Custom CSS section in your Cart Editor Settings.

$\"\"$

","Current version - Installed after 24/02/2025","cart-art-how-to-set-up-sticky-cart","how-to-set-up-sticky-cart","How to set up Sticky Cart?","Access cart drawer from all pages of the store with a button.",[2228,2229,2230],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2237,"_195":647},{"_158":2234,"_193":2235,"_195":2236},{"_158":2231,"_193":2232,"_195":2233},"steps-to-set-up-the-sticky-cart","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Sticky Cart in the app menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Design how the sticky cart is displayed.

$\"\"$

Choose the cart icon in the 9 available options and the colors of the elements: Main background color, icon color, quantity background color, number color.
Change the button shape and size upon your wish.
Set up the position in mobile and desktop view (bottom/top right/left) and on which devices the sticky cart is shown (desktop only, mobile only or all devices).

Step 3:

Check the preview on mobile and desktop.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 5:

If this button at the top right of the page is in grey color, it means the feature is not activated yet. Click so it changes to green and enable the feature.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up the Sticky Cart","what-is-sticky-cart","

The sticky cart button is a button which is visible in all pages of your store. Customer can click this button to see their current cart drawer and the cart will slide from the position that has been set up in the cart editor.

","What is Sticky Cart?","

Access cart drawer from all pages of the store with a button.

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-multi-cart","how-to-set-up-multi-cart","How to set up Multi-Cart?","Also called multiple carts separated by display conditions and settings",[2244,2245,2246,2247],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2255,"_195":647},{"_158":2252,"_193":2253,"_195":2254},{"_158":2158,"_193":2251,"_195":2160},{"_158":2248,"_193":2249,"_195":2250},"steps-to-set-up-multiple-carts","

Step 1: Create a new cart

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab.

Click on duplicate icon if you want to keep the settings and change display conditions.

$\"\"$

If you want to create a cart from scratch, click Create Cart.

$\"\"$

The new cart will be saved as a draft to prevent any conflicts. You can activate it once you’ve completed the settings.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Configure display condition

Click on arrow icon to open the trigger panel.

$\"\"$

Choose the device on which you want the cart to be displayed. e.g., Desktop only

$\"\"$

Choose the targeted customers you want the cart to be shown to. e.g., Logged-in customers

$\"\"$

If you want the cart to be shown for all countries except one or some, choose Include > Select Locations.

$\"\"$

If you want the cart to be shown only for specific countries, choose Exclude > Select Locations.

$\"\"$

Select your start date and end date.

$\"\"$

Click save.

$\"\"$

Activate the cart.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Check how the cart works on store front

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up multiple carts","

Example: Merchants want to create a cart for mobile devices only.

","what-is-multi-cart","

The Multi-Cart feature allows you to create multiple shopping carts with predefined conditions—such as device type, customer location, or time-specific events. This helps you deliver a personalized shopping experience and optimize conversions effortlessly.

Default Cart: The initial cart that appears when you first install the app. It serves as the base setup before additional carts are created.

","What is Multi-Cart?","

Also called multiple carts separated by display conditions and settings

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-a-free-gift-offer-current-version-installed-since-24022025","how-to-set-up-a-free-gift-offer-current-version-installed-since-24022025","How to set up a free gift offer? (Current version - Installed since 24/02/2025)","Offering free items based on conditions like minimum spend, item quantity, or specific products/collections.",[2262,2263,2264,2265],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2275,"_195":647},{"_158":2272,"_193":2273,"_195":2274},{"_158":2269,"_193":2270,"_195":2271},{"_158":2266,"_193":2267,"_195":2268},"steps-to-set-up-a-free-gift-offer","

Step 1:

Access Free Gift Feature

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab. This will open the Cart List page. Click on the cart you want to edit to begin making changes.

$\"\"$

Select Free Gift module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Configure Free Gift Offer

Start by creating the first free gift offer. Click the Create Offer button.

$\"\"$

Choose one of the following trigger types to determine when the free gift is offered:

Minimum quantity of items – e.g., Buy at least 3 items
Minimum purchase amount – e.g., Spend at least $100
Specific Products/Collections – e.g., Purchase from the TEE Collection

$\"\"$

Choose the free gift.

$\"\"$

Click Create offer to save your setting.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Set up Free Gift Settings Settings include:

Limiting total number of free products in cart.
Trigger free gift based on the total value of original (pre-discount) price. Check the box next to the setting(s) you want to apply.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Enable feature and check how your free gift works on the storefront

Click Enable to turn on the feature.

$\"\"$

In store front: Add products to the cart until the minimum requirement is met.
Check if the free gift option appears in the cart.
Manually add the free gift item to the cart.

$\"\"$

Notes: If you encounter any issues where the free gift is not appearing on your storefront, please follow these steps:

Check feature activation: Ensure that the Free Gift feature is enabled in the app settings. Check free gift availability: Make sure the free gift item is in stock and available for purchase in the online store. If you've already reviewed the steps above and your free gift is still not appearing, please contact our support team for further assistance.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up a Free Gift Offer","common-used-case","

Example 1: Offer a free tee when customers spend at least $100.

$\"\"$

Example 2: Offer a free tee when customers buy at least 3 items.

$\"\"$

Example 3: Offer a free tee when customers buy an item from TEE Collection.

$\"\"$

","Common used case","what-is-free-gift","

The Free Gift feature allows you to offer free complimentary items to customers based on specific purchase conditions. You can set up free gifts to show in customer's cart when they meet one of the following criteria:

Minimum Spend Amount – e.g., Spend $100, get a free gift
Minimum Purchase Quantity – e.g., Buy 3 items, get 1 free
Specific Products or Collections – e.g., Buy any item from the TEE Collection collection, get a free item ---

","What is Free Gift?","

Offering free items based on conditions like minimum spend, item quantity, or specific products/collections.

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-ai-recommended-upsells","how-to-set-up-ai-recommended-upsells","How to set up AI recommended Upsells?","Learn how to configure in Shopify Search & Discovery to set up AI recommended Upsells.",[2282,2283],[],{"_158":2287,"_193":2288,"_195":2289},{"_158":2284,"_193":2285,"_195":2286},"steps-to-set-up-ai-recommended-upsells","

Step 1:

To edit the Complementary products and Related products of each product, please navigate to Recommendations page > Find the product you want to edit and click the row. If the main product is not available > Click \"Add recommendations\". !

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Both sections \"Edit complementary products\" and \"Edit related products\" have the \"Browse\" button for you to select the products from your product list. !

$\"\"$

Click \"Browse\", tick the products you want to suggest and click \"Add\". !

$\"\"$

For related products, the data has been auto-generated, however, you can customize by ticking \"Hide auto-generated recommendations\" at the bottom of the page and choose recommended products upon your preferences.

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up AI recommended Upsells","summary","

In the Upsells features, there are 2 methods to set up upsell products. One is by manually creating upsell offer, and the second is to have it automatically set up using the data from Shopify Search & Discovery. !

$\"\"$

For people who have used Shopify Search & Discovery already, it is recommended that you choose to set up upsell products by \"Use AI recommended upsells\" option as it saves more time setting up the upsells comparing to creating manual offers. You can select either \"Complementary\" or \"Related\" option and it takes the data from the app > Recommendations.

$\"\"$

By default, the \"Complementary products\" column is empty and has to be configured manually, only the \"Related products\" has data gathered from customers' behaviour. Click here to see in details how recommendations in this app work.

","Summary","cart-art-how-to-set-up-express-payments","how-to-set-up-express-payments","How to set up Express Payments?","Navigate to checkout page easier with accelerated checkout. Including Shopay, ApplePay, Paypal, GPay, etc.",[2296,2297,2298],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2305,"_195":647},{"_158":2302,"_193":2303,"_195":2304},{"_158":2299,"_193":2300,"_195":2301},"steps-to-set-up-express-payment","

Step 1:

Unlock Express Payments on Shopify Online Store

Go to Edit Code page of your theme

$\"\"$

Go to theme.liquid file

$\"\"$

Hit Ctrl+F or CMD+F and type in <body>

$\"\"$

Add the below code to any blank lines below the first <body> tag

<div style='display:none'> {% if additional_checkout_buttons %} {{ content_for_additional_checkout_buttons }} {% endif %} </div>

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Enable Express Payments Feature

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab. This will open the Cart List page. Click on the cart you want to enable the feature.

$\"\"$

Select Express Payment module in the feature menu. Click Enable to turn on the feature.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Check to see if Express Payments have appeared in your cart.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up Express Payment","what-is-express-payments","

Express Payment refers to special checkout buttons designed for certain payment methods like PayPal, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Shop Pay, and more.

These buttons take customers directly to their preferred payment method, making the checkout process faster and reducing the chances of cart abandonment.

$\"\"$

","What is Express Payments?","

Navigate to checkout page easier with accelerated checkout. Including Shopay, ApplePay, Paypal, GPay, etc.

","cart-art-how-to-convert-the-currency-in-rewards-bar","how-to-convert-the-currency-in-rewards-bar","How to convert the Currency in Rewards Bar?","Learn to convert the currency of the rewards bar when selling to different countries.",[2312,2313],[],{"_158":2287,"_193":2317,"_195":2289},{"_158":2314,"_193":2315,"_195":2316},"steps-to-convert-the-currency-of-rewards-bar","

Step 1: Set up multiple currencies through Shopify Markets.

From your Shopify admin, go to Markets.
Click the market that you want to customize.
Click the + icon next to the Currency setting.
Click the currency, and then select the desired currency from the menu. By default, the market's currency is set to the currency for the region that you've selected for your market. For markets that contain more than one region, Use local currencies is set as the default instead.
Select whether prices are rounded up after currency conversion.
Click Done.
In the top bar, click Save. !

$\"\"$

Step 2: Set up in app.

Go to Rewards bar feature page, tick the box in the Advanced settings called \"Enable Currency converter in Rewards Bar\".

$\"\"$

After that, for each field to input the minimum amount of the tier, you just need to follow your base currency. It will be converted to customers' currencies following the exchange rate of Shopify. Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to convert the currency of Rewards bar","

When creating a reward tier based on the minimum cart value, merchants have to input a number representing the value, which is normally in the default currency of the store.

$\"\"$

If merchants sell to multiple markets, which means a variety of currency, this minimum value has to be converted to show the correct threshold of the rewards bar for each country. The advanced setting \"Enable Currency converter on Rewards Bar\" is for this purpose. However, for this setting to work properly, you need to follow these basic steps:

Step 1: Set up multiple currencies through Shopify Markets. Step 2: Set up in app.

The currency in cart can be converted if you have set up multiple currencies in Shopify Markets and enable Shopify country selector. This advanced setting is used to convert the milestones of the rewards bar only.

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-trust-badges","how-to-set-up-trust-badges","How to set up Trust Badges?","Images of trusted payment options inside the Checkout Box.",[2324,2325,2326,2327],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2337,"_195":647},{"_158":2334,"_193":2335,"_195":2336},{"_158":2331,"_193":2332,"_195":2333},{"_158":2328,"_193":2329,"_195":2330},"step-2","

Select the badges you would like to show in the cart drawer upon our 50 options by clicking the badges directly. If you want to add other images, you can upload your own:

$\"\"$

The new options will then be available at the \"Add your logo\" section and you can click them to start showing in the cart.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Step 2:","steps-to-set-up-trust-badges","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Trust Badges module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

","Steps to set up Trust Badges","what-is-trust-badges","

Trust Badges are visual indicators displayed in the cart drawer to build customer confidence and reassure them about the security and legitimacy of the transaction. These badges typically represent security certifications, payment gateways, guarantees, or positive reviews.

$\"\"$

","What is Trust Badges?","

Images of trusted payment options inside the Checkout Box.

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-terms-conditions-current-version-installed-since-2422025","how-to-set-up-terms-conditions-current-version-installed-since-2422025","How to set up Terms & Conditions? (Current version - Installed since 24/2/2025)","Add a terms and conditions checkbox & require customers to agree to your policies before checkout. It can also be used as a text line.",[2344,2345,2346,2347],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2357,"_195":647},{"_158":2354,"_193":2355,"_195":2356},{"_158":2351,"_193":2352,"_195":2353},{"_158":2348,"_193":2349,"_195":2350},"steps-to-set-up-a-cart-notes","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Terms & Conditions module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Fill in the text that you want the customer to agree with. If you want to link the text with an URL, click on the attachment icon and fill in the link as well as the text.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Select related fields such as checkbox, required and set the color to match your store theme

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Hit \"Save\" to save all the changes

$\"\"$

Step 5:

Enable the module If the button says Enable, it means that the module is not enabled yet. Click on it to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up a Cart Notes","common-use-cases","

Example: Customer needs to agree with checkout rules, terms of use, shipping policy, payment terms, tax duties, the new Canada import tariff notice, refund policy, GDPR/CCPA compliance, and more before checkout. You can also use it for seasonal promotions or special events like Father’s Day, the 4th of July, and Summer Sale terms

","Common use cases:","what-is-terms-conditions","

Add a customizable checkbox to your cart or checkout page for various consent and policy confirmation. Additionally, this feature allows you to display a reminder text to inform customers of important updates or agreements before they complete their purchase.

$\"\"$

","What is Terms & Conditions?","

Add a terms and conditions checkbox & require customers to agree to your policies before checkout. It can also be used as a text line.

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-announcements","how-to-set-up-announcements","How to set up Announcements?","A notification showing an announcement text with countdown timer or multiple announcement texts",[2364,2365,2366,2367,2368,2369],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2383,"_195":647},{"_158":2380,"_193":2381,"_195":2382},{"_158":2158,"_193":2379,"_195":2160},{"_158":2376,"_193":2377,"_195":2378},{"_158":2373,"_193":2374,"_195":2375},{"_158":2370,"_193":2371,"_195":2372},"multiple-announcements","

$\"\"$

The Announcements feature allows to show up to 5 different texts. To set up multiple announcements, you should:

Select Multiple Announcement in the Announcement type
Fill in the content that you want to show to customers, hit \"Add new announcement\" if you want to show more announcements.
Announcements will auto-slide for the time in Display Duration.
Change the font size and style, the text color, and the arrow color.

| You cannot show a time countdown when using Multiple Announcements.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Multiple Announcements","step-4","

Enter the Announcement Text, which will be displayed in the cart drawer. You can add emojis, align the text (left, center, right) and change the font style (normal, italic, bold).
Use {timer} where you want to display the timer. For example: Your products are reserved for {timer} minutes!
Customize the appearance of the text in the cart:

Text size and Text color change the size and color of the normal text, not including the timer.
Timer size and Timer color change the size and color of the timer only.

$\"\"$

Step 5:

$\"\"$

Customize the background color: solid or gradient color of the Announcement.
Adjust top/bottom padding.

Step 6:

Click \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 7:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

","Step 4:","steps-to-set-up-an-announcement","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Announcements module in the feature menu. Click the green Enable button.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Set up the Timer by entering the number of hours and minutes (minimum 1 minute, maximum 24 hours). The countdown starts when the first product is added to the cart.

$\"\"$

| Any value exceeding 24 hours will be automatically adjusted to 24.

| The timer must be set to more than 0 minutes for the announcement to appear in the cart, even if you choose to display text only.

Step 3:

Choose what happens when the countdown ends:

Repeat the Countdown: Resets and starts over.
Hide the Countdown: The announcement bar disappears after the countdown ends.
Remove all items in cart: Removes all items from the cart once the countdown ends.

$\"\"$

","Steps to set up an Announcement","

Example 1: Merchants want to count down 20 minutes since customers add a product to cart.

$\"\"$

Example 2: Merchants want to inform customers about the BUY 2 GET 1 FREE sale campaign.

$\"\"$

","what-is-annoucements","

The Announcements feature displays a notification bar with custom text and a countdown timer. When a customer adds a product to their cart, the countdown timer starts, creating a sense of urgency. This encourages faster checkouts and helps reduce cart abandonment rates. Announcement can be utilized to show other content without a timer, for example promoting a sale campaign.

","What is Annoucements?","

A notification showing an announcement text with countdown timer or multiple announcement texts

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-reward-tier-to-show-by-country","how-to-set-up-reward-tier-to-show-by-country","How to set up reward tier to show by country?","Learn how to utilize the advanced setting of rewards bar to show reward tiers to limited countries.",[2390,2391],[],{"_158":2287,"_193":2395,"_195":2289},{"_158":2392,"_193":2393,"_195":2394},"steps-to-set-up-reward-tier-to-show-by-country","

Step 1: Include the country you want to show to in your Markets.

Navigate to \"Markets\" in your Shopify Admin.

$\"\"$

Check carefully if the country you want to show to is included in your existing markets. If not, click \"Create market\". Set up your new market by giving it a name, then select the countries for this market by clicking \"Add condition\".

$\"\"$

Step 2: Turn on the region selector in your live theme.

Go to \"Online Store\" in your Shopify Admin. Click \"Customize\" button next to your current live theme.

$\"\"$

Select either your \"Header\" or \"Footer\" section (depending on your theme) and turn on the Country/region selector:

$\"\"$

The result should have a field to select the country on your store as in the below screenshot:

$\"\"$

Step 3: Set up the feature in app.

Go to the Rewards Bar feature page, create a tier and tick the option \"Show this tier to limited country only\". Then click \"Select Countries\" and click all the countries you want to see the tier.

$\"\"$

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up reward tier to show by country","

When creating a reward tier for the rewards bar, there is an option under every tier to whether show the tier to limited country selection or not - which means each tier may have a different country display condition.

Example: A common used case is when merchants have 3 different free shipping threshold for different countries. Now we can set up: Tier 1: Free shipping at $30 - only shown for Vietnam, Thailand, Singapore. Tier 2: Free shipping at $70 - only shown for Japan and China. Tier 3: Free shipping at $100 - only shown for Germany.

Instead of seeing 3 reward tiers, each country listed above will only see ONE free shipping threshold in their rewards bar.

$\"\"$

This feature works depending on your Shopify Markets, which creates a region selector that you show on your online store. The basic steps for the feature to work properly are: Step 1: Make sure to include the country you want to show to in your Markets. Step 2: Turn on the region selector in your live theme. Step 3: Set up in app.

","cart-art-how-to-change-add-ons-product","how-to-change-add-ons-product","How to change Add-ons product?","Replace the default Shipping Protection product with another additional product.",[2402],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2403,"_195":647},"

When you first enable the \"Add-ons\" feature, the default additional product is Shipping Protection, with the shield image and the description \"Keep Your Order Safe: Guard Against Damage, Loss, or Theft During Shipping!\". !

$\"\"$

You can change this into a different additional product by navigating to \"Add-ons\" feature page, then edit the product title, product description, and image.

$\"\"$

Similar adjustments can be done by going to \"Products\" in Shopify Admin, find the original Shipping Protection product and edit in the following section:

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-cart-notes-user-guide-current-version-installed-since-2422025","how-to-set-up-cart-notes-user-guide-current-version-installed-since-2422025","How to set up Cart Notes (User Guide - Current Version - Installed since 24/2/2025)","Text field allow putting additional information",[2410,2411,2412,2413,2414],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2423,"_195":647},{"_158":2420,"_193":2421,"_195":2422},{"_158":2417,"_193":2418,"_195":2419},{"_158":2348,"_193":2416,"_195":2350},{"_158":2328,"_193":2415,"_195":2330},"

Fill in the title of the note box and the placeholder text of it

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Hit \"Save\" to save all the changes

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Enable the module

If the button says Enable, it means that the module is not enabled yet. Click on it to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Cart Notes module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

","common-use-case","

Example: Customer wants to notice the merchant about shipment, packaging or product content

","Common use case:","what-is-cart-notes","

It's a text box being hidden under a text line, allowing customers to put additional notice for seller such as special requirements or shipping notice.

$\"\"$

","What is Cart Notes?","

Text field allow putting additional information

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-rewards-bar-current-version-installed-since-2422025","how-to-set-up-rewards-bar-current-version-installed-since-2422025","How to set up Rewards Bar? (Current version - Installed since 24/2/2025)","A 'Free Shipping bar' progress bar that motivates customer to buy more",[2431,2432,2433,2434],"Oct 6, 2025",[],{"_158":2440,"_193":2441,"_195":2442},{"_158":2158,"_193":2439,"_195":2160},{"_158":2436,"_193":2437,"_195":2438},{"_158":513,"_193":2435,"_195":2185},"

$\"\"$

Reward Bar module includes 5 advanced settings in general settings:

Show rewards on empty cart: Reward bar will show even if the cart is empty
Allow customers changing added item quantities in their cart: Quantity of products added by \"Free product\" reward type can't be changed
Enable Currency converter on Rewards Bar: Reward bar will run dynamically according to the customer preferred currency
Add discount amount to rewards bar: Discounted amount will be re-added to the reward bar
Remove auto-added products when the cart value is lower than the Minimum Amount: Rewarded products are removed if cart value drops below the tier’s minimum. Each reward tier will also have 1 advanced settings: Show this tier to limited country only: Limit countries from seeing this tier. Each tier can be set to show for different countries

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","steps-to-set-up-a-reward-bar","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Reward Bar module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Select the Template and how the reward bar will run

$\"\"$

You can select how the reward bar show \"With or without icon\". Also, select how it runs in the dropdown \"Count the reward bar based on\"

Total value: The amount that the customer have to pay for items in cart
Total quantity: Sum of cart product's quantity

Step 3:

Edit the tier to match your rule

$\"\"$

Reward types: Including 4 types: Free Shipping, Free Product, Discount, Free Gift. These 4 types will be presented by 4 icons (In #1 template) in cart. Their mechanism are different: Free Shipping and Discount will only change the icon (In #1 template) of the tier to visualize the reward. But Free Product will automatically add a product to cart when the cart value is larger than Minimum Amount, and Free Gift will work based on the set up inside Free Gift module
Reward Description: Text line show under reward icon
Minimum Amount: The smallest cart value that the customer need to purchase to achieve this reward
Text before completing this tier: Text line runs above reward bar before the tier gets filled

Step 4:

Edit reward color and final text

$\"\"$

Text after completing full reward bar: Text line above the reward bar shows when all the tiers are reached

Step 5:

Hit \"Save\" to save all the changes

$\"\"$

Step 6:

If the button says Enable, it means that the module is not enabled yet. Click on it to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Step 7:

Create matching discounts on Shopify

$\"\"$

Except for Free Gift, 3 other types will need to have discounts to work as rewards in cart. These discounts will be set up with the similar condition to the reward tier. For example: I have set up Free Shipping tier when the customer reaches $100 in Total value. I will have to set a automatic Free Shipping discount on Shopify with minimum purchase requirement of $100 then hit Save

$\"\"$

","Steps to set up a Reward Bar","

Example 1: Merchant wants to give free shipping fee for customers spending $100 and more

$\"\"$

Example 2: Merchants want to add multiple rewards: free shipping at $100, free product at $200 and 20% total order discount at $500

$\"\"$

","what-is-reward-bar","

When the customer starts adding products to their cart and you want to offer them some discounts based on their cart value, the rewards bar will serve as a progress tracker that helps them know how close they are to earning rewards. This will increase sales as people will want to buy more and receive valuable rewards.

","What is Reward Bar?","cart-art-add-ons","add-ons","Add-ons",[2449],"Sep 29, 2025",[],{"_158":543,"_193":2450,"_195":647},"

Add-ons is a feature that displays special services or products offered by merchants—such as shipping protection, gift wrapping, and more—directly in the cart.

$\"\"$

Price settings

Fixed Price: A set amount charged for the additional product. Example: $5 for Shipping Protection.

$\"\"$

Percentage Price: A dynamic charge based on order value. !

$\"\"$

Initial Amount: The minimum charge, applied if the calculated percentage is lower than this value.
Percentage of Order Value: The percentage of the order total to charge.
Incremental Rates: Adjusts the charge in increments (up to 99 values). This price setting will create a product with 100 variants in your store with the formula:

Final charge = ** Initial Amount + (n×Incremental Rate) **

(n = ordinal number of the variant closest to the percentage of the order value)

Example: Shipping Protection is 10% of the order value, with a $5 minimum and $0.5 incremental rate. If the order is $2995, the charge would be $300.

Tier Price: The price varies based on order value, divided into defined ranges.

Example: $2 for Shipping Protection if the order is under $100, $5 if it's $101 to $500, and $10 if it's more than $500.!

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-multi-cart","multi-cart","Multi-Cart",[2456],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2457,"_195":647},"

Default Cart: The initial cart that appears when you first install the app. It serves as the base setup before additional carts are created.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-trust-badges","trust-badges","Trust Badges",[2463],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2464,"_195":647},"

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-display-conditions","display-conditions","Display Conditions",[2470],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2471,"_195":647},"

Display Conditions are the rules that trigger which cart is shown to the customer. These include:

Targeted Device – e.g., show a specific cart on mobile, desktop or tablet
Targeted Customer – e.g., logged-in customers or guest customers
Location – e.g., country-based targeting
Active Period – e.g., show a cart only during a specific time or promotional event !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-abandoned-cart","abandoned-cart","Abandoned Cart",[2477],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2478,"_195":647},"

Key terms used in the Abandoned Cart feature

Cart abandoned rate:

The percentage of carts created but not progressed to checkout. This rate indicates how often customers add items to their cart but leave before starting the checkout process.

$\"\"$

Checkout abandoned rate:

The percentage of checkouts that were initiated but did not result in a completed order. This metric shows how often customers start the checkout process but leave before finishing their purchase.

$\"\"$

Behaviour funnel:

The Behavior Funnel tracks the progression of logged-in and unknown customers through key purchase stages.

Total cart The total number of carts created.
Cart abandoned The number of carts that were abandoned, either in the cart drawer or during checkout.
Cart checkout Number of customers who proceeded from the cart to the checkout page.
Cart paid The number of carts that successfully completed checkout with payment. This funnel helps visualize where customers drop off in the journey from adding items to completing an order.

Customer details:

Customer Displays the customer’s email address. If no email is available, show \"Unknown\".
Last seen The timestamp of the customer’s last recorded activity (e.g., adding a product to cart, entering checkout).
Abandon type Indicates the stage where the customer dropped off:

Cart → The customer added products to cart but did not proceed to checkout.
Checkout → The customer reached the checkout page but did not complete the purchase.
Paid → The customer attempted payment but did not successfully complete the order (e.g., payment failure).

Products The list of products that were in the customer’s cart at the time of abandonment.
Cart value The total value of all products listed in Products at the time of abandonment. ---

Product details

The product details include all the products that are added to cart, no matter if they are in the abandoned carts or are already paid.

Product The product name according to Shopify data.
Variant The specific variant of the product (e.g., size, color).
Checkout started The total number of checkouts that included this product in cart.
Abandon rate The percentage of sessions where this product is added to cart but the purchase is not completed. This includes both cart abandonment (customer left before starting checkout) and checkout abandonment (customer reached checkout but did not finish the order).
Abandon value The total cart value associated with all abandoned checkouts/abandoned containing this product.
Price The unit price of the product (based on the variant selected).
Total quantity The total number of units of this product that were added to cart, regardless of whether the checkout was eventually completed or abandoned. ---

For additional support with abandoned cart analytics, Ego currently provides free assistance. Please feel free to contact us anytime via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-free-gift","Free Gift",[2483],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2484,"_195":647},"

Minimum Purchase Quantity – e.g., Buy 3 items, get 1 free
Minimum Spend Amount – e.g., Spend $50, get a free gift
Specific Products or Collections – e.g., Buy any item from the \"Skincare\" collection, get a free item

*Free gifts are not **automatically added** to the cart. Customers must manually select the gift after meeting the conditions.*

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-rewards-bar","rewards-bar","Rewards Bar",[2490],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2491,"_195":647},"

$\"\"$

Reward tiers are the milestones of the reward that customer has reached, and those tiers will be set through the Reward Types within the module. Reward types include: Free Shipping, Free Product, Discount, Free Gift.

These 4 types will be presented by 4 icons (In #1 template) in cart.
Their mechanism are different: Free Shipping and Discount will only change the icon (In #1 template) of the tier to visualize the reward. But Free Product will automatically add a product to cart when the cart value is larger than Minimum Amount, and Free Gift will work based on the set up inside Free Gift module Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-sticky-cart","sticky-cart","Sticky Cart",[2497],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2498,"_195":647},"

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-position","Position",[2503],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2504,"_195":647},"

The Position feature allows you to rearrange the module placement within the cart drawer based on your preferences. The cart drawer is divided into two main sections: Main Cart and Checkout Box, which include smaller modules. The modules can only be moved within its original main section. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-cart-notes","cart-notes","Cart Notes",[2510],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2511,"_195":647},"

Cart Notes is a text box being hidden under a text line, allowing customers to put additional information for merchants such as special requirements or shipping notice. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-upsells","upsells","Upsells",[2517],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2518,"_195":647},"

Customers can add these items to their cart with just a few clicks, increasing the chances of additional sales. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-announcement","announcement","Announcement",[2524],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2525,"_195":647},"

The Announcement feature displays a notification bar with custom text and a countdown timer. When a customer adds a product to their cart, the countdown timer starts, creating a sense of urgency. This encourages faster checkouts and helps reduce cart abandonment rates. !

$\"\"$

Announcement can be utilized to show other content without a timer, for example promoting a sale campaign. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-express-payments","express-payments","Express Payments",[2531],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2532,"_195":647},"

Express Payment refers to special checkout buttons designed for certain payment methods like PayPal, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Shop Pay, and more.

These buttons take customers directly to their preferred payment method, making the checkout process faster and reducing the chances of cart abandonment. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-customized-text-terms-conditions","customized-text-terms-conditions","Customized Text (Terms & Conditions)",[2539],"Oct 24, 2025",[],{"_158":543,"_193":2540,"_195":647},"

$\"\"$

Add a customizable checkbox to your cart or checkout page for various consent and policy confirmation, such as checkout rules, terms of use, shipping policy, payment terms, tax duties, the new Canada import tariff notice, refund policy, GDPR/CCPA compliance, and more. You can also use it for seasonal promotions or special events like Father’s Day, the 4th of July, and Summer Sale terms. Additionally, this feature allows you to display a reminder text to inform customers of important updates or agreements before they complete their purchase.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-discount-box","discount-box","Discount Box",[2546],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2547,"_195":647},"

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

",{"_158":3348,"_160":1776,"_2559":1971,"_2560":3349,"_2562":3350,"_2564":3351,"_2566":2567,"_2568":3352,"_2570":3353,"_2572":3354},{"_158":3214,"_160":1645,"_2559":1646,"_2560":3215,"_2562":3216,"_2564":3217,"_2566":2567,"_2568":3218,"_2570":3067,"_2572":3219},{"_158":3062,"_160":1249,"_2559":1250,"_2560":3063,"_2562":3064,"_2564":3065,"_2566":2567,"_2568":3066,"_2570":3067,"_2572":3068},{"_158":3056,"_160":1732,"_2559":3057,"_2560":3058,"_2562":3059,"_2564":3060,"_2566":2960,"_2568":-5,"_2570":2961,"_2572":3061},{"_158":2970,"_160":1053,"_2559":1054,"_2560":2971,"_2562":2972,"_2564":2973,"_2566":2567,"_2568":2974,"_2570":2975,"_2572":2976},{"_158":2963,"_160":2964,"_2559":2965,"_2560":2966,"_2562":2967,"_2564":2968,"_2566":2960,"_2568":-5,"_2570":2961,"_2572":2969},{"_158":2954,"_160":2955,"_2559":2956,"_2560":2957,"_2562":2958,"_2564":2959,"_2566":2960,"_2568":-5,"_2570":2961,"_2572":2962},{"_158":2839,"_160":837,"_2559":838,"_2560":2840,"_2562":2841,"_2564":2842,"_2566":2567,"_2568":-5,"_2570":2571,"_2572":2843},{"_158":2737,"_160":626,"_2559":627,"_2560":2738,"_2562":2739,"_2564":2740,"_2566":2567,"_2568":-5,"_2570":2741,"_2572":2742},{"_158":2558,"_160":177,"_2559":179,"_2560":2561,"_2562":2563,"_2564":2565,"_2566":2567,"_2568":2569,"_2570":2571,"_2572":2573},"cmpv17zp5007f97b4em2jbs1g","name","tagline","Customer surveys & feedback loops","icon","MessageSquare","description","Survey types, trigger rules, and response analytics.","status","live","appStoreUrl","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-surveys","articleCount",19,"categories",[2574,2575,2576,2577,2578],{"_158":2710,"_160":2711,"_2581":551,"_2562":2712,"_2583":2713},{"_158":2669,"_160":2670,"_2581":434,"_2562":2671,"_2583":2672},{"_158":2631,"_160":2632,"_2581":325,"_2562":2633,"_2583":2634},{"_158":2604,"_160":2605,"_2581":251,"_2562":708,"_2583":2606},{"_158":2579,"_160":2580,"_2581":181,"_2562":2582,"_2583":2584},"c9d4e737ccc929d437fa7ad98","troubleshooting-faq","label","Wrench","articles",[2585,2586],{"_158":218,"_160":182,"_162":219,"_164":220,"_166":2597,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2598},{"_158":159,"_160":161,"_162":163,"_164":165,"_166":2587,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2588},[2589,2590,2591,2592,2593,2594,2595,2596],[182,183],{"_158":215,"_193":216,"_195":217},{"_158":212,"_193":213,"_195":214},{"_158":209,"_193":210,"_195":211},{"_158":206,"_193":207,"_195":208},{"_158":203,"_193":204,"_195":205},{"_158":200,"_193":201,"_195":202},{"_158":197,"_193":198,"_195":199},{"_158":192,"_193":194,"_195":196},[2599,2600,2601,2602,2603],[223,224],{"_158":242,"_193":243,"_195":244},{"_158":239,"_193":240,"_195":241},{"_158":236,"_193":237,"_195":238},{"_158":233,"_193":234,"_195":235},{"_158":230,"_193":231,"_195":232},"c36014750194297e14e6041af","analytics-integrations",[2607,2608,2609,2610],{"_158":297,"_160":183,"_162":298,"_164":299,"_166":2625,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":2626},{"_158":284,"_160":271,"_162":285,"_164":286,"_166":2621,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2622},{"_158":266,"_160":253,"_162":267,"_164":268,"_166":2616,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2617},{"_158":245,"_160":246,"_162":247,"_164":248,"_166":2611,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2612},[2613,2614,2615],[252,253],{"_158":263,"_193":264,"_195":265},{"_158":260,"_193":261,"_195":262},{"_158":257,"_193":258,"_195":259},[2618,2619,2620],[271,246],{"_158":281,"_193":282,"_195":283},{"_158":278,"_193":279,"_195":280},{"_158":275,"_193":276,"_195":277},[2623,2624],[253,183],{"_158":294,"_193":295,"_195":296},{"_158":291,"_193":292,"_195":293},[2627,2628,2629,2630],[271,253],{"_158":317,"_193":318,"_195":319},{"_158":314,"_193":315,"_195":316},{"_158":311,"_193":312,"_195":313},{"_158":308,"_193":309,"_195":310},"c07b885f5512f564e1ac23210","channels-targeting","Layers",[2635,2636,2637,2638,2639],{"_158":415,"_160":416,"_162":417,"_164":418,"_166":2665,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":302,"_174":2666},{"_158":393,"_160":326,"_162":394,"_164":395,"_166":2659,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":2660},{"_158":374,"_160":375,"_162":376,"_164":377,"_166":2654,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2655},{"_158":348,"_160":327,"_162":349,"_164":350,"_166":2647,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2648},{"_158":320,"_160":224,"_162":321,"_164":322,"_166":2640,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":2641},[2642,2643,2644,2645,2646],[326,327],{"_158":345,"_193":346,"_195":347},{"_158":342,"_193":343,"_195":344},{"_158":339,"_193":340,"_195":341},{"_158":336,"_193":337,"_195":338},{"_158":333,"_193":334,"_195":335},[2649,2650,2651,2652,2653],[224,353],{"_158":371,"_193":372,"_195":373},{"_158":368,"_193":369,"_195":370},{"_158":365,"_193":366,"_195":367},{"_158":362,"_193":363,"_195":364},{"_158":359,"_193":360,"_195":361},[2656,2657,2658],[380,224],{"_158":390,"_193":391,"_195":392},{"_158":387,"_193":388,"_195":389},{"_158":384,"_193":385,"_195":386},[2661,2662,2663,2664],[224,398],{"_158":412,"_193":413,"_195":414},{"_158":409,"_193":410,"_195":411},{"_158":406,"_193":407,"_195":408},{"_158":403,"_193":404,"_195":405},[2667,2668],[326,327,375],{"_158":426,"_193":427,"_195":428},{"_158":423,"_193":424,"_195":425},"c71984d62b6d44d387a015838","building-surveys","Zap",[2673,2674,2675,2676,2677],{"_158":516,"_160":460,"_162":517,"_164":518,"_166":2702,"_168":169,"_170":520,"_172":302,"_174":2703},{"_158":498,"_160":499,"_162":500,"_164":501,"_166":2697,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":2698},{"_158":477,"_160":252,"_162":478,"_164":479,"_166":2691,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":2692},{"_158":455,"_160":353,"_162":456,"_164":457,"_166":2685,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2686},{"_158":429,"_160":398,"_162":430,"_164":431,"_166":2678,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2679},[2680,2681,2682,2683,2684],[416,326],{"_158":452,"_193":453,"_195":454},{"_158":449,"_193":450,"_195":451},{"_158":446,"_193":447,"_195":448},{"_158":443,"_193":444,"_195":445},{"_158":440,"_193":441,"_195":442},[2687,2688,2689,2690],[460,327],{"_158":474,"_193":475,"_195":476},{"_158":471,"_193":472,"_195":473},{"_158":468,"_193":469,"_195":470},{"_158":465,"_193":466,"_195":467},[2693,2694,2695,2696],[246,460],{"_158":495,"_193":496,"_195":497},{"_158":492,"_193":493,"_195":494},{"_158":489,"_193":490,"_195":491},{"_158":486,"_193":487,"_195":488},[2699,2700,2701],[460,252],{"_158":513,"_193":514,"_195":515},{"_158":510,"_193":511,"_195":512},{"_158":507,"_193":508,"_195":509},[2704,2705,2706,2707,2708,2709],[499,353],{"_158":543,"_193":544,"_195":545},{"_158":540,"_193":541,"_195":542},{"_158":537,"_193":538,"_195":539},{"_158":534,"_193":535,"_195":536},{"_158":531,"_193":532,"_195":533},{"_158":528,"_193":529,"_195":530},"c873d213c751083a1340f514a","getting-started","Rocket",[2714,2715,2716],{"_158":594,"_160":223,"_162":595,"_164":596,"_166":2730,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":2731},{"_158":565,"_160":552,"_162":566,"_164":567,"_166":2722,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":2723},{"_158":546,"_160":380,"_162":547,"_164":548,"_166":2717,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2718},[2719,2720,2721],[552,460],{"_158":562,"_193":563,"_195":564},{"_158":559,"_193":560,"_195":561},{"_158":556,"_193":557,"_195":558},[2724,2725,2726,2727,2728,2729],[460,416,375],{"_158":591,"_193":592,"_195":593},{"_158":588,"_193":589,"_195":590},{"_158":585,"_193":586,"_195":587},{"_158":582,"_193":583,"_195":584},{"_158":579,"_193":580,"_195":581},{"_158":576,"_193":577,"_195":578},[2732,2733,2734,2735,2736],[552,380,182],{"_158":616,"_193":617,"_195":618},{"_158":613,"_193":614,"_195":615},{"_158":610,"_193":611,"_195":612},{"_158":607,"_193":608,"_195":609},{"_158":604,"_193":605,"_195":606},"cmpv17z2k006o97b415c8lnk0","Native iOS & Android for Shopify stores","Smartphone","App design, launch process, push notifications, and integrations.",13,[2743,2744,2745,2746,2747],{"_158":2833,"_160":2711,"_2581":551,"_2562":2712,"_2583":2834},{"_158":2798,"_160":2799,"_2581":742,"_2562":2671,"_2583":2800},{"_158":2779,"_160":2780,"_2581":708,"_2562":708,"_2583":2781},{"_158":2770,"_160":2771,"_2581":691,"_2562":2633,"_2583":2772},{"_158":2748,"_160":2749,"_2581":628,"_2562":2582,"_2583":2750},"mob-cat-app-submission","app-submission",[2751,2752],{"_158":648,"_160":649,"_162":650,"_164":651,"_166":2760,"_168":624,"_170":653,"_172":173,"_174":2761},{"_158":619,"_160":620,"_162":621,"_164":622,"_166":2753,"_168":624,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":2754},[2755,2756,2757,2758,2759],[],{"_158":543,"_193":646,"_195":647},{"_158":643,"_193":644,"_195":645},{"_158":640,"_193":641,"_195":642},{"_158":637,"_193":638,"_195":639},{"_158":634,"_193":635,"_195":636},[2762,2763,2764,2765,2766,2767,2768,2769],[],{"_158":543,"_193":684,"_195":647},{"_158":681,"_193":682,"_195":683},{"_158":678,"_193":679,"_195":680},{"_158":675,"_193":676,"_195":677},{"_158":672,"_193":673,"_195":674},{"_158":669,"_193":670,"_195":671},{"_158":666,"_193":667,"_195":668},{"_158":663,"_193":664,"_195":665},"mob-cat-notifications","notifications",[2773],{"_158":685,"_160":686,"_162":687,"_164":688,"_166":2774,"_168":624,"_170":520,"_172":173,"_174":2775},[2776,2777,2778],[],{"_158":543,"_193":701,"_195":647},{"_158":698,"_193":699,"_195":700},{"_158":695,"_193":696,"_195":697},"mob-cat-settings","settings",[2782,2783,2784,2785],{"_158":728,"_160":729,"_162":730,"_164":731,"_166":2795,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2796},{"_158":720,"_160":721,"_162":722,"_164":723,"_166":2792,"_168":624,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":2793},{"_158":711,"_160":712,"_162":713,"_164":714,"_166":2789,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2790},{"_158":702,"_160":703,"_162":704,"_164":705,"_166":2786,"_168":624,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2787},[2788],[],{"_158":543,"_193":710,"_195":647},[2791],[],{"_158":543,"_193":719,"_195":647},[2794],[],{"_158":543,"_193":727,"_195":647},[2797],[],{"_158":543,"_193":735,"_195":647},"mob-cat-design-customize","design-customize",[2801,2802,2803,2804,2805],{"_158":817,"_160":543,"_162":647,"_164":818,"_166":2830,"_168":624,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2831},{"_158":809,"_160":810,"_162":811,"_164":812,"_166":2827,"_168":624,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2828},{"_158":801,"_160":802,"_162":803,"_164":804,"_166":2824,"_168":624,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2825},{"_158":787,"_160":788,"_162":789,"_164":790,"_166":2820,"_168":624,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2821},{"_158":736,"_160":737,"_162":738,"_164":739,"_166":2806,"_168":624,"_170":520,"_172":173,"_174":2807},[2808,2809,2810,2811,2812,2813,2814,2815,2816,2817,2818,2819],[],{"_158":543,"_193":786,"_195":647},{"_158":783,"_193":784,"_195":785},{"_158":780,"_193":781,"_195":782},{"_158":777,"_193":778,"_195":779},{"_158":774,"_193":775,"_195":776},{"_158":771,"_193":772,"_195":773},{"_158":768,"_193":769,"_195":770},{"_158":765,"_193":766,"_195":767},{"_158":762,"_193":763,"_195":764},{"_158":759,"_193":760,"_195":761},{"_158":634,"_193":758,"_195":636},{"_158":755,"_193":756,"_195":757},[2822,2823],[],{"_158":798,"_193":799,"_195":800},{"_158":795,"_193":796,"_195":797},[2826],[],{"_158":543,"_193":808,"_195":647},[2829],[],{"_158":543,"_193":816,"_195":647},[2832],[],{"_158":543,"_193":822,"_195":647},"mob-cat-getting-started",[2835],{"_158":823,"_160":824,"_162":825,"_164":826,"_166":2836,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2837},[2838],[],{"_158":543,"_193":830,"_195":647},"cmpv17yfr005x97b4sf35ih2z","Server-side pixel & attribution","Target","Pixel setup, server-side events, and attribution testing.",[2844,2845,2846,2847,2848],{"_158":2941,"_160":2711,"_2581":551,"_2562":2712,"_2583":2942},{"_158":2890,"_160":2891,"_2581":912,"_2562":2671,"_2583":2892},{"_158":2876,"_160":2877,"_2581":881,"_2562":2633,"_2583":2878},{"_158":2864,"_160":2865,"_2581":864,"_2562":2866,"_2583":2867},{"_158":2849,"_160":2850,"_2581":839,"_2562":708,"_2583":2851},"fbpx-cat-feed","feed",[2852,2853,2854],{"_158":850,"_160":851,"_162":852,"_164":853,"_166":2861,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2862},{"_158":842,"_160":843,"_162":844,"_164":845,"_166":2858,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2859},{"_158":831,"_160":832,"_162":833,"_164":834,"_166":2855,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2856},[2857],[],{"_158":543,"_193":841,"_195":647},[2860],[],{"_158":543,"_193":849,"_195":647},[2863],[],{"_158":543,"_193":857,"_195":647},"fbpx-cat-catalog","catalog","BookOpen",[2868,2869],{"_158":867,"_160":868,"_162":869,"_164":870,"_166":2873,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2874},{"_158":858,"_160":859,"_162":860,"_164":861,"_166":2870,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2871},[2872],[],{"_158":543,"_193":866,"_195":647},[2875],[],{"_158":543,"_193":874,"_195":647},"fbpx-cat-analytics","analytics",[2879,2880],{"_158":898,"_160":899,"_162":900,"_164":901,"_166":2887,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2888},{"_158":875,"_160":876,"_162":877,"_164":878,"_166":2881,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2882},[2883,2884,2885,2886],[],{"_158":895,"_193":896,"_195":897},{"_158":892,"_193":893,"_195":894},{"_158":889,"_193":890,"_195":891},{"_158":886,"_193":887,"_195":888},[2889],[],{"_158":543,"_193":905,"_195":647},"fbpx-cat-launch-your-pixel","launch-your-pixel",[2893,2894,2895,2896,2897,2898,2899,2900,2901,2902],{"_158":1010,"_160":1011,"_162":1012,"_164":1013,"_166":2938,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2939},{"_158":1003,"_160":1004,"_162":1005,"_164":1005,"_166":2935,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2936},{"_158":987,"_160":988,"_162":989,"_164":990,"_166":2930,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2931},{"_158":973,"_160":974,"_162":975,"_164":976,"_166":2926,"_168":624,"_170":520,"_172":173,"_174":2927},{"_158":966,"_160":967,"_162":968,"_164":968,"_166":2923,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2924},{"_158":959,"_160":960,"_162":961,"_164":961,"_166":2920,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2921},{"_158":951,"_160":952,"_162":953,"_164":954,"_166":2917,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2918},{"_158":935,"_160":936,"_162":937,"_164":938,"_166":2912,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2913},{"_158":915,"_160":916,"_162":917,"_164":918,"_166":2906,"_168":624,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":2907},{"_158":906,"_160":907,"_162":908,"_164":909,"_166":2903,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2904},[2905],[],{"_158":543,"_193":914,"_195":647},[2908,2909,2910,2911],[],{"_158":543,"_193":934,"_195":647},{"_158":931,"_193":932,"_195":933},{"_158":928,"_193":929,"_195":930},{"_158":925,"_193":926,"_195":927},[2914,2915,2916],[],{"_158":543,"_193":950,"_195":647},{"_158":947,"_193":948,"_195":949},{"_158":944,"_193":945,"_195":946},[2919],[],{"_158":543,"_193":958,"_195":647},[2922],[],{"_158":543,"_193":965,"_195":647},[2925],[],{"_158":543,"_193":972,"_195":647},[2928,2929],[],{"_158":984,"_193":985,"_195":986},{"_158":981,"_193":982,"_195":983},[2932,2933,2934],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1002,"_195":647},{"_158":999,"_193":1000,"_195":1001},{"_158":996,"_193":997,"_195":998},[2937],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1009,"_195":647},[2940],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1017,"_195":647},"fbpx-cat-getting-started",[2943,2944],{"_158":1040,"_160":824,"_162":1041,"_164":1042,"_166":2951,"_168":624,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":2952},{"_158":1018,"_160":1019,"_162":1020,"_164":1021,"_166":2945,"_168":624,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2946},[2947,2948,2949,2950],[],{"_158":1037,"_193":1038,"_195":1039},{"_158":1034,"_193":1035,"_195":1036},{"_158":1031,"_193":1032,"_195":1033},{"_158":1028,"_193":1029,"_195":1030},[2953],[],{"_158":1046,"_193":1047,"_195":1048},"cmpv17xsa005697b40y98t6qg","order-tracking","Ego Order Tracking","Branded post-purchase experience","MapPin","Branded tracking pages, carrier setup, and notification emails.","coming-soon",0,[],"cmpv17x4x004f97b437bh7jpd","preorder","Ego Preorder","Sell before inventory arrives","Clock","Set up preorders, manage queues, and communicate with customers.",[],"cmpv17wgw003o97b4nas9x6fe","Always-visible add-to-cart button","Pin","Configure the sticky button appearance and behavior.","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-sticky-add-to-cart-bar",10,[2977,2978,2979,2980],{"_158":3041,"_160":2711,"_2581":551,"_2562":2712,"_2583":3042},{"_158":3014,"_160":3015,"_2581":1144,"_2562":2671,"_2583":3016},{"_158":3000,"_160":3001,"_2581":1111,"_2562":708,"_2583":3002},{"_158":2981,"_160":2580,"_2581":181,"_2562":2582,"_2583":2982},"c24166febf1a915ee46fee863",[2983,2984],{"_158":1081,"_160":1055,"_162":1082,"_164":1083,"_166":2993,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2994},{"_158":1049,"_160":161,"_162":163,"_164":1050,"_166":2985,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":2986},[2987,2988,2989,2990,2991,2992],[1055,1056],{"_158":1078,"_193":1079,"_195":1080},{"_158":1075,"_193":1076,"_195":1077},{"_158":1072,"_193":1073,"_195":1074},{"_158":1069,"_193":1070,"_195":1071},{"_158":1066,"_193":1067,"_195":1068},{"_158":1063,"_193":1064,"_195":1065},[2995,2996,2997,2998,2999],[1086,1087],{"_158":1103,"_193":1104,"_195":1105},{"_158":1100,"_193":1101,"_195":1102},{"_158":1097,"_193":1098,"_195":1099},{"_158":1094,"_193":1095,"_195":1096},{"_158":230,"_193":1093,"_195":232},"c51d7ac875f53533a20780ff2","managing-analytics",[3003,3004],{"_158":1126,"_160":1112,"_162":1127,"_164":1128,"_166":3010,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3011},{"_158":1106,"_160":183,"_162":1107,"_164":1108,"_166":3005,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3006},[3007,3008,3009],[1112,1113],{"_158":1123,"_193":1124,"_195":1125},{"_158":1120,"_193":1121,"_195":1122},{"_158":1117,"_193":1118,"_195":1119},[3012,3013],[1113,183],{"_158":1136,"_193":1137,"_195":1138},{"_158":1133,"_193":1134,"_195":1135},"c00ec6b1680aa0b2244332911","customization",[3017,3018,3019,3020],{"_158":1193,"_160":1159,"_162":1194,"_164":1195,"_166":3036,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3037},{"_158":1172,"_160":1056,"_162":1173,"_164":1174,"_166":3030,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3031},{"_158":1153,"_160":1154,"_162":1155,"_164":1156,"_166":3025,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3026},{"_158":1139,"_160":1087,"_162":1140,"_164":1141,"_166":3021,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3022},[3023,3024],[1056,1112],{"_158":1150,"_193":1151,"_195":1152},{"_158":1147,"_193":1148,"_195":1149},[3027,3028,3029],[1159,1113],{"_158":1169,"_193":1170,"_195":1171},{"_158":1166,"_193":1167,"_195":1168},{"_158":1163,"_193":1164,"_195":1165},[3032,3033,3034,3035],[1159,1087],{"_158":1190,"_193":1191,"_195":1192},{"_158":1187,"_193":1188,"_195":1189},{"_158":1184,"_193":1185,"_195":1186},{"_158":1181,"_193":1182,"_195":1183},[3038,3039,3040],[1154,1056],{"_158":1207,"_193":1208,"_195":1209},{"_158":1204,"_193":1205,"_195":1206},{"_158":1201,"_193":1202,"_195":1203},"c036995fb515135a5adc363bf",[3043,3044],{"_158":1227,"_160":1086,"_162":1228,"_164":1229,"_166":3050,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":3051},{"_158":1210,"_160":1113,"_162":1211,"_164":1212,"_166":3045,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":302,"_174":3046},[3047,3048,3049],[1159,1056],{"_158":1224,"_193":1225,"_195":1226},{"_158":1221,"_193":1222,"_195":1223},{"_158":1218,"_193":1219,"_195":1220},[3052,3053,3054,3055],[1113,1055],{"_158":1242,"_193":1243,"_195":1244},{"_158":613,"_193":1240,"_195":1241},{"_158":1237,"_193":1238,"_195":1239},{"_158":604,"_193":1236,"_195":606},"cmpv17vsj002x97b4o94w3ow5","Ego Bundles","Fixed bundles, kits & mix-and-match","Package","Create and manage fixed bundles, kits, and mix-and-match offers.",[],"cmpv17v4j002697b4tp0lv0oe","Recurring billing & customer portal","RefreshCw","Subscription plans, billing, portals, and analytics.","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-subscriptions",17,[3069,3070,3071,3072,3073],{"_158":3188,"_160":2711,"_2581":551,"_2562":2712,"_2583":3189},{"_158":3165,"_160":3166,"_2581":1520,"_2562":2671,"_2583":3167},{"_158":3134,"_160":3135,"_2581":1432,"_2562":2633,"_2583":3136},{"_158":3098,"_160":3099,"_2581":1330,"_2562":708,"_2583":3100},{"_158":3074,"_160":2580,"_2581":181,"_2562":2582,"_2583":3075},"c833f1bae690fda3ffdbffc3a",[3076,3077],{"_158":1294,"_160":1295,"_162":1296,"_164":1297,"_166":3090,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3091},{"_158":1245,"_160":161,"_162":163,"_164":1246,"_166":3078,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3079},[3080,3081,3082,3083,3084,3085,3086,3087,3088,3089],[1251,1252,1253],{"_158":1291,"_193":1292,"_195":1293},{"_158":1288,"_193":1289,"_195":1290},{"_158":1285,"_193":1286,"_195":1287},{"_158":1282,"_193":1283,"_195":1284},{"_158":1279,"_193":1280,"_195":1281},{"_158":1276,"_193":1277,"_195":1278},{"_158":1273,"_193":1274,"_195":1275},{"_158":1270,"_193":1271,"_195":1272},{"_158":1267,"_193":1268,"_195":1269},{"_158":1264,"_193":1265,"_195":1266},[3092,3093,3094,3095,3096,3097],[1300,1301],{"_158":1321,"_193":1322,"_195":1323},{"_158":1318,"_193":1319,"_195":1320},{"_158":1315,"_193":1316,"_195":1317},{"_158":1312,"_193":1313,"_195":1314},{"_158":1309,"_193":1310,"_195":1311},{"_158":230,"_193":1308,"_195":232},"c6299ca3ddbe24556379cbf1b","managing-subscriptions",[3101,3102,3103,3104,3105],{"_158":1405,"_160":1331,"_162":1406,"_164":1407,"_166":3128,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":3129},{"_158":1388,"_160":1371,"_162":1389,"_164":1390,"_166":3123,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3124},{"_158":1366,"_160":1251,"_162":1367,"_164":1368,"_166":3117,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3118},{"_158":1348,"_160":1349,"_162":1350,"_164":1351,"_166":3112,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3113},{"_158":1324,"_160":1325,"_162":1326,"_164":1327,"_166":3106,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3107},[3108,3109,3110,3111],[1331,1332],{"_158":1345,"_193":1346,"_195":1347},{"_158":1343,"_193":1344,"_195":316},{"_158":1340,"_193":1341,"_195":1342},{"_158":1337,"_193":1338,"_195":1339},[3114,3115,3116],[1251,1252],{"_158":1363,"_193":1364,"_195":1365},{"_158":1360,"_193":1361,"_195":1362},{"_158":1357,"_193":1358,"_195":1359},[3119,3120,3121,3122],[1349,1371],{"_158":1385,"_193":1386,"_195":1387},{"_158":1382,"_193":1383,"_195":1384},{"_158":1379,"_193":1380,"_195":1381},{"_158":1376,"_193":1377,"_195":1378},[3125,3126,3127],[1331,1349],{"_158":1402,"_193":1403,"_195":1404},{"_158":1399,"_193":1400,"_195":1401},{"_158":1396,"_193":1397,"_195":1398},[3130,3131,3132,3133],[1371,1251],{"_158":1423,"_193":1424,"_195":1425},{"_158":1420,"_193":1421,"_195":1422},{"_158":1417,"_193":1418,"_195":1419},{"_158":1414,"_193":1415,"_195":1416},"ceb05d9e018aa955508b635cb","storefront-customer-portal",[3137,3138,3139,3140],{"_158":1489,"_160":1301,"_162":1490,"_164":1491,"_166":3158,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":3159},{"_158":1460,"_160":1252,"_162":1461,"_164":1462,"_166":3150,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":3151},{"_158":1441,"_160":1442,"_162":1443,"_164":1444,"_166":3145,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3146},{"_158":1426,"_160":1427,"_162":1428,"_164":1429,"_166":3141,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3142},[3143,3144],[1301,1252],{"_158":1438,"_193":1439,"_195":1440},{"_158":1435,"_193":1436,"_195":1437},[3147,3148,3149],[1301,1447],{"_158":1457,"_193":1458,"_195":1459},{"_158":1454,"_193":1455,"_195":1456},{"_158":1451,"_193":1452,"_195":1453},[3152,3153,3154,3155,3156,3157],[1301,1349,1331],{"_158":1486,"_193":1487,"_195":1488},{"_158":1483,"_193":1484,"_195":1485},{"_158":1480,"_193":1481,"_195":1482},{"_158":1477,"_193":1478,"_195":1479},{"_158":1474,"_193":1475,"_195":1476},{"_158":1471,"_193":1472,"_195":1473},[3160,3161,3162,3163,3164],[1300,1427,1295],{"_158":1511,"_193":1512,"_195":1513},{"_158":1508,"_193":1509,"_195":1510},{"_158":1505,"_193":1506,"_195":1507},{"_158":1502,"_193":1503,"_195":1504},{"_158":1499,"_193":1500,"_195":1501},"c6b9963262270dec8095d03cf","subscription-plans",[3168,3169,3170],{"_158":1554,"_160":1521,"_162":1555,"_164":1556,"_166":3182,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3183},{"_158":1534,"_160":1332,"_162":1535,"_164":1536,"_166":3176,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3177},{"_158":1514,"_160":1515,"_162":1516,"_164":1517,"_166":3171,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3172},[3173,3174,3175],[1447,1521],{"_158":1531,"_193":1532,"_195":1533},{"_158":1528,"_193":1529,"_195":1530},{"_158":1525,"_193":1526,"_195":1527},[3178,3179,3180,3181],[1521,1331],{"_158":1551,"_193":1552,"_195":1553},{"_158":1548,"_193":1549,"_195":1550},{"_158":1545,"_193":1546,"_195":1547},{"_158":1414,"_193":1543,"_195":1544},[3184,3185,3186,3187],[1447,1251],{"_158":1572,"_193":1573,"_195":1574},{"_158":1569,"_193":1570,"_195":1571},{"_158":1566,"_193":1567,"_195":1568},{"_158":1563,"_193":1564,"_195":1565},"cab289c6d3befba733f5f6eef",[3190,3191,3192],{"_158":1618,"_160":1300,"_162":1619,"_164":1620,"_166":3206,"_168":169,"_170":1622,"_172":302,"_174":3207},{"_158":1591,"_160":1447,"_162":1592,"_164":1593,"_166":3198,"_168":169,"_170":520,"_172":302,"_174":3199},{"_158":1575,"_160":1253,"_162":1576,"_164":1577,"_166":3193,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3194},[3195,3196,3197],[1331,1447],{"_158":1588,"_193":1589,"_195":1590},{"_158":1585,"_193":1586,"_195":1587},{"_158":634,"_193":1583,"_195":1584},[3200,3201,3202,3203,3204,3205],[1521,1332,1295],{"_158":591,"_193":1617,"_195":593},{"_158":1614,"_193":1615,"_195":1616},{"_158":1611,"_193":1612,"_195":1613},{"_158":1608,"_193":1609,"_195":1610},{"_158":1605,"_193":1606,"_195":1607},{"_158":1602,"_193":1603,"_195":1604},[3208,3209,3210,3211,3212,3213],[1447,1301,1295],{"_158":1638,"_193":1639,"_195":1640},{"_158":783,"_193":1636,"_195":1637},{"_158":613,"_193":1635,"_195":615},{"_158":1632,"_193":1633,"_195":1634},{"_158":607,"_193":1631,"_195":609},{"_158":604,"_193":1630,"_195":606},"cmpv17uhj001f97b4pfhu70bg","Automatic gifts at spending thresholds","Gift","Configure gift thresholds, rules, and customer-facing displays.","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-free-gift",[3220,3221,3222,3223,3224],{"_158":3332,"_160":2711,"_2581":551,"_2562":2712,"_2583":3333},{"_158":3288,"_160":3289,"_2581":1818,"_2562":2671,"_2583":3290},{"_158":3268,"_160":3269,"_2581":1769,"_2562":2633,"_2583":3270},{"_158":3248,"_160":3249,"_2581":1716,"_2562":708,"_2583":3250},{"_158":3225,"_160":2580,"_2581":181,"_2562":2582,"_2583":3226},"c4119c54f4b0b85a36ce37580",[3227,3228],{"_158":1684,"_160":1647,"_162":1685,"_164":1686,"_166":3240,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3241},{"_158":1641,"_160":161,"_162":163,"_164":1642,"_166":3229,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3230},[3231,3232,3233,3234,3235,3236,3237,3238,3239],[1647,1648,183],{"_158":1681,"_193":1682,"_195":1683},{"_158":1678,"_193":1679,"_195":1680},{"_158":1675,"_193":1676,"_195":1677},{"_158":1072,"_193":1673,"_195":1674},{"_158":1670,"_193":1671,"_195":1672},{"_158":1667,"_193":1668,"_195":1669},{"_158":1664,"_193":1665,"_195":1666},{"_158":1661,"_193":1662,"_195":1663},{"_158":1658,"_193":1659,"_195":1660},[3242,3243,3244,3245,3246,3247],[1689,1690],{"_158":1103,"_193":1710,"_195":1711},{"_158":1707,"_193":1708,"_195":1709},{"_158":1704,"_193":1705,"_195":1706},{"_158":1701,"_193":1702,"_195":1703},{"_158":1698,"_193":1699,"_195":1700},{"_158":230,"_193":1697,"_195":232},"cd31aee8e8f77cf61cb4965a1","upsell-bundles-analytics",[3251,3252,3253],{"_158":1746,"_160":1717,"_162":1747,"_164":1748,"_166":3263,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3264},{"_158":1731,"_160":1732,"_162":1733,"_164":1734,"_166":3259,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3260},{"_158":1712,"_160":183,"_162":1107,"_164":1713,"_166":3254,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3255},[3256,3257,3258],[1717,1718],{"_158":1728,"_193":1729,"_195":1730},{"_158":1725,"_193":1726,"_195":1727},{"_158":1722,"_193":1723,"_195":1724},[3261,3262],[1717,1737],{"_158":1743,"_193":1744,"_195":1745},{"_158":1740,"_193":1741,"_195":1742},[3265,3266,3267],[1732,183],{"_158":1760,"_193":1761,"_195":1762},{"_158":1757,"_193":1758,"_195":1759},{"_158":1754,"_193":1755,"_195":1756},"c0e37e26cf5e5171d0a3c21ee","widgets-display",[3271,3272,3273],{"_158":1796,"_160":1690,"_162":1797,"_164":1798,"_166":3283,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3284},{"_158":1782,"_160":1737,"_162":1783,"_164":1784,"_166":3279,"_168":1786,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3280},{"_158":1763,"_160":1764,"_162":1765,"_164":1766,"_166":3274,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3275},[3276,3277,3278],[1737,1647],{"_158":1779,"_193":1780,"_195":1781},{"_158":1776,"_193":1777,"_195":1778},{"_158":1773,"_193":1774,"_195":1775},[3281,3282],[1690,1764],{"_158":1793,"_193":1794,"_195":1795},{"_158":1790,"_193":1791,"_195":1792},[3285,3286,3287],[1737,1648],{"_158":1810,"_193":1811,"_195":1812},{"_158":1807,"_193":1808,"_195":1809},{"_158":1804,"_193":1805,"_195":1806},"c03f0dc304a0d1ea160715429","gift-campaigns",[3291,3292,3293,3294,3295,3296,3297],{"_158":1911,"_160":1912,"_162":1913,"_164":1914,"_166":3328,"_168":1871,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3329},{"_158":1899,"_160":1819,"_162":1900,"_164":1901,"_166":3323,"_168":1871,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3324},{"_158":1885,"_160":1886,"_162":1887,"_164":1888,"_166":3318,"_168":1871,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3319},{"_158":1866,"_160":1867,"_162":1868,"_164":1869,"_166":3313,"_168":1871,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3314},{"_158":1850,"_160":1838,"_162":1851,"_164":1852,"_166":3308,"_168":169,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3309},{"_158":1832,"_160":1833,"_162":1834,"_164":1835,"_166":3303,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3304},{"_158":1813,"_160":1648,"_162":1814,"_164":1815,"_166":3298,"_168":169,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3299},[3300,3301,3302],[1690,1819],{"_158":1829,"_193":1830,"_195":1831},{"_158":1826,"_193":1827,"_195":1828},{"_158":1823,"_193":1824,"_195":1825},[3305,3306,3307],[1838,1648],{"_158":1847,"_193":1848,"_195":1849},{"_158":1844,"_193":1845,"_195":1846},{"_158":1545,"_193":1842,"_195":1843},[3310,3311,3312],[1833,1819],{"_158":342,"_193":1864,"_195":1865},{"_158":1861,"_193":1862,"_195":1863},{"_158":1858,"_193":1859,"_195":1860},[3315,3316,3317],[1737,1690],{"_158":1882,"_193":1883,"_195":1884},{"_158":1879,"_193":1880,"_195":1881},{"_158":1876,"_193":1877,"_195":1878},[3320,3321,3322],[1819,1648],{"_158":1896,"_193":1897,"_195":1898},{"_158":1879,"_193":1895,"_195":1881},{"_158":1876,"_193":1894,"_195":1878},[3325,3326,3327],[1648,1838],{"_158":1908,"_193":1909,"_195":1910},{"_158":1879,"_193":1907,"_195":1881},{"_158":1876,"_193":1894,"_195":1878},[3330,3331],[],{"_158":1922,"_193":1923,"_195":1924},{"_158":1919,"_193":1920,"_195":1921},"c86b1c2a1edac4348db04aeb1",[3334,3335],{"_158":1947,"_160":1689,"_162":1948,"_164":1949,"_166":3342,"_168":1929,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":3343},{"_158":1925,"_160":1718,"_162":1926,"_164":1927,"_166":3336,"_168":1929,"_170":301,"_172":302,"_174":3337},[3338,3339,3340,3341],[1819,1867,1647],{"_158":1944,"_193":1945,"_195":1946},{"_158":1941,"_193":1942,"_195":1943},{"_158":1938,"_193":1939,"_195":1940},{"_158":1935,"_193":1936,"_195":1937},[3344,3345,3346,3347],[1718,1737,1647],{"_158":1962,"_193":1963,"_195":1964},{"_158":1960,"_193":1961,"_195":615},{"_158":1958,"_193":1959,"_195":612},{"_158":1956,"_193":1957,"_195":609},"cmpv17ttx000o97b4207vce57","Slide-out cart with upsells & rewards","ShoppingCart","Setup, customization, and troubleshooting for the Cart Drawer app.","https://apps.shopify.com/opus-cart-drawer-cart-upsell",47,[3355,3356,3357,3358],{"_158":3553,"_160":2711,"_2581":551,"_2562":2712,"_2583":3554},{"_158":3440,"_160":3441,"_2581":2150,"_2562":2671,"_2583":3442},{"_158":3375,"_160":3376,"_2581":2003,"_2562":708,"_2583":3377},{"_158":3359,"_160":2580,"_2581":181,"_2562":2582,"_2583":3360},"cart-cat-troubleshooting-faq",[3361,3362,3363],{"_158":1991,"_160":1992,"_162":1993,"_164":1993,"_166":3372,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3373},{"_158":1974,"_160":1975,"_162":1976,"_164":1976,"_166":3367,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3368},{"_158":1965,"_160":1966,"_162":1967,"_164":1967,"_166":3364,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3365},[3366],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1973,"_195":647},[3369,3370,3371],[],{"_158":1988,"_193":1989,"_195":1990},{"_158":1985,"_193":1986,"_195":1987},{"_158":1982,"_193":1983,"_195":1984},[3374],[],{"_158":543,"_193":1997,"_195":647},"cart-cat-billing-plans","billing-plans",[3378,3379,3380,3381,3382,3383,3384,3385,3386,3387,3388,3389],{"_158":2129,"_160":2130,"_162":2131,"_164":2132,"_166":3436,"_168":1929,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3437},{"_158":2109,"_160":2110,"_162":2111,"_164":2112,"_166":3430,"_168":1969,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3431},{"_158":2086,"_160":2087,"_162":2088,"_164":2088,"_166":3423,"_168":1969,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3424},{"_158":2075,"_160":2076,"_162":2077,"_164":2077,"_166":3419,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3420},{"_158":2063,"_160":2064,"_162":2065,"_164":2065,"_166":3414,"_168":2067,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3415},{"_158":2056,"_160":2057,"_162":2058,"_164":2058,"_166":3411,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3412},{"_158":2049,"_160":2050,"_162":2051,"_164":2051,"_166":3408,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3409},{"_158":2042,"_160":2043,"_162":2044,"_164":2044,"_166":3405,"_168":2027,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3406},{"_158":2031,"_160":2032,"_162":2033,"_164":2033,"_166":3401,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3402},{"_158":2023,"_160":2024,"_162":2025,"_164":2025,"_166":3398,"_168":2027,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3399},{"_158":2006,"_160":2007,"_162":2008,"_164":2008,"_166":3393,"_168":1929,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3394},{"_158":1998,"_160":1999,"_162":2000,"_164":2000,"_166":3390,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3391},[3392],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2005,"_195":647},[3395,3396,3397],[],{"_158":2020,"_193":2021,"_195":2022},{"_158":2017,"_193":2018,"_195":2019},{"_158":2014,"_193":2015,"_195":2016},[3400],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2030,"_195":647},[3403,3404],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2041,"_195":647},{"_158":2038,"_193":2039,"_195":2040},[3407],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2048,"_195":647},[3410],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2055,"_195":647},[3413],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2062,"_195":647},[3416,3417,3418],[],{"_158":2020,"_193":2074,"_195":2022},{"_158":2017,"_193":2073,"_195":2019},{"_158":2014,"_193":2072,"_195":2016},[3421,3422],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2085,"_195":647},{"_158":2082,"_193":2083,"_195":2084},[3425,3426,3427,3428,3429],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2108,"_195":647},{"_158":2105,"_193":2106,"_195":2107},{"_158":2102,"_193":2103,"_195":2104},{"_158":2099,"_193":2100,"_195":2101},{"_158":2096,"_193":2097,"_195":2098},[3432,3433,3434,3435],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2128,"_195":647},{"_158":2125,"_193":2126,"_195":2127},{"_158":2122,"_193":2123,"_195":2124},{"_158":2119,"_193":2120,"_195":2121},[3438,3439],[],{"_158":2140,"_193":2141,"_195":2142},{"_158":2137,"_193":2138,"_195":2139},"cart-cat-features-setup","features-setup",[3443,3444,3445,3446,3447,3448,3449,3450,3451,3452,3453,3454,3455,3456,3457,3458,3459],{"_158":2424,"_160":2425,"_162":2426,"_164":2427,"_166":3547,"_168":2429,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3548},{"_158":2404,"_160":2405,"_162":2406,"_164":2407,"_166":3540,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3541},{"_158":2396,"_160":2397,"_162":2398,"_164":2399,"_166":3537,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3538},{"_158":2384,"_160":2385,"_162":2386,"_164":2387,"_166":3533,"_168":1969,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3534},{"_158":2358,"_160":2359,"_162":2360,"_164":2361,"_166":3525,"_168":1969,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3526},{"_158":2338,"_160":2339,"_162":2340,"_164":2341,"_166":3519,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3520},{"_158":2318,"_160":2319,"_162":2320,"_164":2321,"_166":3513,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3514},{"_158":2306,"_160":2307,"_162":2308,"_164":2309,"_166":3509,"_168":1969,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3510},{"_158":2290,"_160":2291,"_162":2292,"_164":2293,"_166":3504,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3505},{"_158":2276,"_160":2277,"_162":2278,"_164":2279,"_166":3500,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3501},{"_158":2256,"_160":2257,"_162":2258,"_164":2259,"_166":3494,"_168":1969,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3495},{"_158":2238,"_160":2239,"_162":2240,"_164":2241,"_166":3488,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3489},{"_158":2222,"_160":2223,"_162":2224,"_164":2225,"_166":3483,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3484},{"_158":2209,"_160":2210,"_162":2211,"_164":2211,"_166":3479,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3480},{"_158":2193,"_160":2194,"_162":2195,"_164":2196,"_166":3474,"_168":1969,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3475},{"_158":2165,"_160":2166,"_162":2167,"_164":2168,"_166":3466,"_168":2170,"_170":301,"_172":173,"_174":3467},{"_158":2143,"_160":2144,"_162":2145,"_164":2146,"_166":3460,"_168":2148,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3461},[3462,3463,3464,3465],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2164,"_195":647},{"_158":2161,"_193":2162,"_195":2163},{"_158":2158,"_193":2159,"_195":2160},{"_158":2155,"_193":2156,"_195":2157},[3468,3469,3470,3471,3472,3473],[],{"_158":2190,"_193":2191,"_195":2192},{"_158":2158,"_193":2189,"_195":2160},{"_158":2186,"_193":2187,"_195":2188},{"_158":513,"_193":2184,"_195":2185},{"_158":2181,"_193":2182,"_195":2183},{"_158":2178,"_193":2179,"_195":2180},[3476,3477,3478],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2208,"_195":647},{"_158":2205,"_193":2206,"_195":2207},{"_158":2202,"_193":2203,"_195":2204},[3481,3482],[],{"_158":2219,"_193":2220,"_195":2221},{"_158":2216,"_193":2217,"_195":2218},[3485,3486,3487],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2237,"_195":647},{"_158":2234,"_193":2235,"_195":2236},{"_158":2231,"_193":2232,"_195":2233},[3490,3491,3492,3493],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2255,"_195":647},{"_158":2252,"_193":2253,"_195":2254},{"_158":2158,"_193":2251,"_195":2160},{"_158":2248,"_193":2249,"_195":2250},[3496,3497,3498,3499],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2275,"_195":647},{"_158":2272,"_193":2273,"_195":2274},{"_158":2269,"_193":2270,"_195":2271},{"_158":2266,"_193":2267,"_195":2268},[3502,3503],[],{"_158":2287,"_193":2288,"_195":2289},{"_158":2284,"_193":2285,"_195":2286},[3506,3507,3508],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2305,"_195":647},{"_158":2302,"_193":2303,"_195":2304},{"_158":2299,"_193":2300,"_195":2301},[3511,3512],[],{"_158":2287,"_193":2317,"_195":2289},{"_158":2314,"_193":2315,"_195":2316},[3515,3516,3517,3518],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2337,"_195":647},{"_158":2334,"_193":2335,"_195":2336},{"_158":2331,"_193":2332,"_195":2333},{"_158":2328,"_193":2329,"_195":2330},[3521,3522,3523,3524],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2357,"_195":647},{"_158":2354,"_193":2355,"_195":2356},{"_158":2351,"_193":2352,"_195":2353},{"_158":2348,"_193":2349,"_195":2350},[3527,3528,3529,3530,3531,3532],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2383,"_195":647},{"_158":2380,"_193":2381,"_195":2382},{"_158":2158,"_193":2379,"_195":2160},{"_158":2376,"_193":2377,"_195":2378},{"_158":2373,"_193":2374,"_195":2375},{"_158":2370,"_193":2371,"_195":2372},[3535,3536],[],{"_158":2287,"_193":2395,"_195":2289},{"_158":2392,"_193":2393,"_195":2394},[3539],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2403,"_195":647},[3542,3543,3544,3545,3546],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2423,"_195":647},{"_158":2420,"_193":2421,"_195":2422},{"_158":2417,"_193":2418,"_195":2419},{"_158":2348,"_193":2416,"_195":2350},{"_158":2328,"_193":2415,"_195":2330},[3549,3550,3551,3552],[],{"_158":2440,"_193":2441,"_195":2442},{"_158":2158,"_193":2439,"_195":2160},{"_158":2436,"_193":2437,"_195":2438},{"_158":513,"_193":2435,"_195":2185},"cart-cat-getting-started",[3555,3556,3557,3558,3559,3560,3561,3562,3563,3564,3565,3566,3567,3568,3569],{"_158":2541,"_160":2542,"_162":2543,"_164":2543,"_166":3612,"_168":2170,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3613},{"_158":2533,"_160":2534,"_162":2535,"_164":2341,"_166":3609,"_168":2537,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3610},{"_158":2526,"_160":2527,"_162":2528,"_164":2528,"_166":3606,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3607},{"_158":2519,"_160":2520,"_162":2521,"_164":2521,"_166":3603,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3604},{"_158":2512,"_160":2513,"_162":2514,"_164":2514,"_166":3600,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3601},{"_158":2505,"_160":2506,"_162":2507,"_164":2507,"_166":3597,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3598},{"_158":2499,"_160":440,"_162":2500,"_164":2500,"_166":3594,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3595},{"_158":2492,"_160":2493,"_162":2494,"_164":2494,"_166":3591,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3592},{"_158":2485,"_160":2486,"_162":2487,"_164":2427,"_166":3588,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3589},{"_158":2479,"_160":1645,"_162":2480,"_164":2480,"_166":3585,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3586},{"_158":2472,"_160":2473,"_162":2474,"_164":2474,"_166":3582,"_168":2447,"_170":171,"_172":173,"_174":3583},{"_158":2465,"_160":2466,"_162":2467,"_164":2467,"_166":3579,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3580},{"_158":2458,"_160":2459,"_162":2460,"_164":2460,"_166":3576,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3577},{"_158":2451,"_160":2452,"_162":2453,"_164":2453,"_166":3573,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3574},{"_158":2443,"_160":2444,"_162":2445,"_164":2445,"_166":3570,"_168":2447,"_170":716,"_172":173,"_174":3571},[3572],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2450,"_195":647},[3575],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2457,"_195":647},[3578],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2464,"_195":647},[3581],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2471,"_195":647},[3584],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2478,"_195":647},[3587],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2484,"_195":647},[3590],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2491,"_195":647},[3593],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2498,"_195":647},[3596],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2504,"_195":647},[3599],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2511,"_195":647},[3602],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2518,"_195":647},[3605],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2525,"_195":647},[3608],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2532,"_195":647},[3611],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2540,"_195":647},[3614],[],{"_158":543,"_193":2547,"_195":647},"user","admin","appUrl","https://www.egohub.co"]

How can we help?

Browse by App

Ego Cart Drawer

Ego Free Gift

Ego Subscriptions

Ego Bundles

Ego Sticky Add to Cart

Ego Preorder

Ego Order Tracking

Ego Facebook Pixel

Ego Mobile App Builder

Ego Survey

Popular Articles